Panasonic KX-TAW848 Advanced Hybrid and Wireless PBX Feature

Panasonic KX-TAW848 Advanced Hybrid and Wireless PBX Feature
Panasonic Telephone Systems
KX-TAW848
www.voicesonic.com
Phone 877-289-2829
Advanced Hybrid & Wireless PBX
Feature Manual
Panasonic KX-TAW848, KX TAW848, KXTAW848, TAW848
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid & Wireless PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
PSMPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later
Document Version: 2007-02-01
Introduction
About the Feature Manual
The Feature Manual is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic
Advanced Hybrid & Wireless PBX. It explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its
many features and facilities.
The Feature Manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1 Features and Configurations
Describes the call handling, system configuration and administration features of the PBX.
Section 2 Appendix
Provides tables listing capacity of system resources, tone and ring tone tables, and the revision history of
this Feature Manual.
Index
An alphabetical listing of features and terms, as well as the page numbers of related sections.
References Found in the Feature Manual
Installation Manual References
The Advanced Hybrid & Wireless PBX Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and
maintenance of the PBX. Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Manual for
your reference.
Programming References
–
–
PC Programming Manual
Commonly used settings can be programmed using the KX-TAW848 Maintenance Console
(→1.13.5 PC Programming). These PC programming items are noted throughout the Feature
Manual for your reference by title and System Menu number.
PT Programming Manual
Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT (→ 1.13.15 PT Programming).
These PT programming items are noted throughout the Feature Manual for your reference by title
and program number.
Feature Manual References
Related sections of the Feature Manual are listed for your reference.
Operating Manual References
The Advanced Hybrid & Wireless PBX Operating Manual describes how users can access commonly used
PBX features and functions with their proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), portable
stations (PSs), and DSS Consoles. Sections from the Operating Manual are listed throughout the Feature
Manual for your reference.
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If viewing this Feature Manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature Manual
and other PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
2
Feature Manual
Linked items include:
•
Installation Manual References
•
Feature Manual References
•
Operating Manual References
•
PT Programming References
•
PC Programming References
Abbreviations
There are many abbreviations used in this manual (e.g., "PT", for proprietary telephone). Please refer to the
list in the next section for the meaning of each abbreviation.
Notes
•
•
•
•
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the
cover of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the
software version of the PBX or installed cards? in the FAQ of the PC Programming Manual, or [190]
Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference in the PT Programming Manual.
Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Please consult
your dealer for more information.
Product specifications are subject to change without notice. In some cases, additional information,
including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the KX-TAW848 Maintenance Console's
Information Before Programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance Console to view this
information.
All system programming can be performed through PC programming (→ 1.13.5 PC Programming).
However, only a subset can be performed through PT programming (→ 1.13.15 PT Programming).
Throughout this manual, programming references are included as follows:
PC Programming
The number within the brackets indicates the System Menu number for the Maintenance Console.
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
PT Programming
The number within the brackets indicates the programming number that is entered when
performing PT programming.
→ [001] System Speed Dialing Number
For further details, please refer to the PC Programming Manual and PT Programming Manual.
WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes
unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke
has stopped and contact an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
Trademarks
•
•
•
Microsoft, Windows, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Feature Manual
3
Feature Highlights
Voice Mail Features
A Voice Processing System (VPS) can be connected to the PBX to provide Voice Mail (VM) and Automated
Attendant (AA) services. A Panasonic VPS which supports DPT (Digital) Integration can be connected to
the PBX effortlessly and with minimal setup required. Conventional DTMF (analog) voice mail systems,
including those from other manufacturers, are also supported.
(→ 1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)
Paralleled Telephone Features
By connecting an SLT in parallel to an analog proprietary telephone (APT) that is connected to a Hybrid port
of the PBX, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional
extension cards. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT.
(→ 1.13.2 Paralleled Telephone)
Portable Station (PS) Features
A Panasonic PS can be used in place of a PT to provide wireless access to PBX features and call handling.
When in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, a PS can share an extension number with a wired telephone, allowing
extension users to use their PSs when they are away from their desks to answer or make calls as if they
were using their wired telephones.
Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Features
By just installing an optional voice message card in the PBX, simple answering machine services can be
provided. (→ 1.16.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message))
4
Feature Manual
List of Abbreviations
A
AA → Automated Attendant
ANI → Automatic Number Identification
APT → Analog Proprietary Telephone
ARS → Automatic Route Selection
B
BGM → Background Music
C
CLI → Calling Line Identification
COS → Class of Service
CPC → Calling Party Control
CS → Cell Station
D
DIL → Direct In Line
DISA → Direct Inward System Access
DND → Do Not Disturb
DSS → Direct Station Selection
DTMF → Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
E
EFA → External Feature Access
F
FWD → Call Forwarding
G
G-CO → Group-CO
I
ICD → Incoming Call Distribution
IRNA → Intercept Routing—No Answer
L
L-CO → Loop-CO
LCS → Live Call Screening
LED → Light Emitting Diode
O
OGM → Outgoing Message
Feature Manual
5
P
PIN → Personal Identification Number
PS → Portable Station
PT → Proprietary Telephone
S
S-CO → Single-CO
SLT → Single Line Telephone
SMDR → Station Message Detail Recording
SVM → Simplified Voice Message
T
TAFAS → Trunk Answer from Any Station
TRG → Trunk Group
TRS → Toll Restriction
U
UCD → Uniform Call Distribution
V
VM → Voice Mail
VPS → Voice Processing System
X
XDP → EXtra Device Port
6
Feature Manual
Table of Contents
1
Features and Configurations............................................................... 11
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.2
1.2.1
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
1.3.11
1.3.12
1.3.13
1.3.14
1.3.15
1.3.16
1.3.17
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
A ...................................................................................................................................... 12
Absent Message .............................................................................................................. 12
Account Code Entry ......................................................................................................... 13
ARS (Automatic Route Selection) .................................................................................... 14
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) ............................................................................... 20
Automatic Extension Release .......................................................................................... 21
Automatic Fax Transfer .................................................................................................... 22
Automatic Time Adjustment ............................................................................................. 23
B ...................................................................................................................................... 25
BGM (Background Music) ................................................................................................ 25
C ...................................................................................................................................... 26
Caller ID ........................................................................................................................... 26
Call Hold .......................................................................................................................... 29
Call Log, Incoming ........................................................................................................... 32
Call Monitor...................................................................................................................... 34
Call Park .......................................................................................................................... 36
Call Pickup ....................................................................................................................... 37
Call Splitting ..................................................................................................................... 39
Call Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 39
Call Waiting Tone ............................................................................................................. 41
CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution ..................................................................... 42
CO Line Access ............................................................................................................... 44
CO Line Call Limitation .................................................................................................... 46
Conference ...................................................................................................................... 47
Confirmation Tone............................................................................................................ 48
Consultation Hold............................................................................................................. 50
COS (Class of Service).................................................................................................... 50
CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection.................................................................. 51
D ...................................................................................................................................... 53
Data Line Security............................................................................................................ 53
Dial Mode Selection ......................................................................................................... 53
Dial Tone .......................................................................................................................... 54
Dial Tone Transfer ............................................................................................................ 55
DIL (Direct In Line)........................................................................................................... 57
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) .............................................................................. 58
Display Information .......................................................................................................... 67
DND (Do Not Disturb) ...................................................................................................... 68
Door Open ....................................................................................................................... 69
Doorphone Call ................................................................................................................ 70
E....................................................................................................................................... 72
EFA (External Feature Access)........................................................................................ 72
Emergency Call................................................................................................................ 73
Executive Busy Override.................................................................................................. 73
Extension Dial Lock ......................................................................................................... 74
Extension Feature Clear .................................................................................................. 75
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).............................................................. 76
Feature Manual
7
1.5.7
1.5.8
1.5.9
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
1.7
1.7.1
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
1.9.8
1.9.9
1.9.10
1.9.11
1.9.12
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
1.11.5
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.13
1.13.1
8
Extension Port Configuration ...........................................................................................78
External Relay..................................................................................................................78
External Sensor ...............................................................................................................79
F .......................................................................................................................................82
Fixed Buttons ...................................................................................................................82
Flash/Recall/Terminate.....................................................................................................83
Flexible Buttons................................................................................................................84
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ..............................................................................87
Floating Extension............................................................................................................92
FWD (Call Forwarding).....................................................................................................93
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button ............................................................................97
G .................................................................................................................................... 101
GROUP FEATURES ...................................................................................................... 101
H.....................................................................................................................................105
Hands-free Answerback ................................................................................................. 105
Hands-free Operation..................................................................................................... 106
Headset Operation .........................................................................................................106
HOSPITALITY FEATURES ............................................................................................ 107
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) ........ 107
Hot Line..........................................................................................................................109
I ...................................................................................................................................... 111
ICD GROUP FEATURES ............................................................................................... 111
ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution ............................................................... 114
ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out ............................................................................ 117
ICD Group Features—Overflow ..................................................................................... 119
ICD Group Features—Queuing...................................................................................... 121
ICD Group Features—VIP Call ...................................................................................... 123
Idle Extension Hunting ................................................................................................... 124
INCOMING CALL FEATURES ....................................................................................... 126
Intercept Routing............................................................................................................ 128
Intercept Routing—No Destination................................................................................. 132
Intercom Call .................................................................................................................. 133
Internal Call Block .......................................................................................................... 134
L .....................................................................................................................................136
LED Indication................................................................................................................ 136
Line Preference—Incoming............................................................................................ 138
Line Preference—Outgoing............................................................................................ 139
Local Alarm Information ................................................................................................. 139
M .................................................................................................................................... 142
Manager Features .......................................................................................................... 142
MEMORY DIALING FEATURES .................................................................................... 143
Message Waiting............................................................................................................ 145
Music on Hold ................................................................................................................ 146
Mute ............................................................................................................................... 147
O .................................................................................................................................... 148
OGM (Outgoing Message) ............................................................................................. 148
One-touch Dialing .......................................................................................................... 150
Operator Features .......................................................................................................... 151
P.....................................................................................................................................152
Paging ............................................................................................................................ 152
Feature Manual
1.13.2
1.13.3
1.13.4
1.13.5
1.13.6
1.13.7
1.13.8
1.13.9
1.13.10
1.13.11
1.13.12
1.13.13
1.13.14
1.13.15
1.14
1.14.1
1.14.2
1.15
1.15.1
1.15.2
1.16
1.16.1
1.16.2
1.16.3
1.16.4
1.16.5
1.17
1.17.1
1.17.2
1.17.3
1.17.4
1.17.5
1.18
1.18.1
1.19
1.19.1
1.19.2
1.19.3
1.19.4
1.19.5
1.20
1.20.1
1.20.2
1.20.3
2
Paralleled Telephone...................................................................................................... 154
Password Security ......................................................................................................... 155
Pause Insertion .............................................................................................................. 156
PC Programming ........................................................................................................... 157
Power Failure Restart .................................................................................................... 159
Power Failure Transfer ................................................................................................... 160
Predialing ....................................................................................................................... 160
Printing Message ........................................................................................................... 161
Privacy Release ............................................................................................................. 161
PS Connection ............................................................................................................... 162
PS Directory................................................................................................................... 164
PS Feature Buttons........................................................................................................ 165
PS Ring Group............................................................................................................... 165
PT Programming............................................................................................................ 169
Q .................................................................................................................................... 171
Quick Dialing .................................................................................................................. 171
Quick Setup ................................................................................................................... 172
R .................................................................................................................................... 173
Redial, Last Number ...................................................................................................... 173
Ring Tone Pattern Selection .......................................................................................... 173
S..................................................................................................................................... 176
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)................................................................... 176
Special Carrier Access Code ......................................................................................... 183
Speed Dialing, Personal................................................................................................. 183
Speed Dialing, System................................................................................................... 184
SVM (Simplified Voice Message) ................................................................................... 185
T..................................................................................................................................... 192
TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) ...................................................................... 192
Tenant Service ............................................................................................................... 192
Timed Reminder ............................................................................................................ 196
Time Service .................................................................................................................. 198
TRS (Toll Restriction) ..................................................................................................... 202
U .................................................................................................................................... 210
Upgrading the Software ................................................................................................. 210
V..................................................................................................................................... 211
Verification Code Entry .................................................................................................. 211
Virtual PS ....................................................................................................................... 212
Voice Mail (VM) Group ................................................................................................... 213
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration ............................................................................... 216
Voice Mail DTMF Integration.......................................................................................... 222
W.................................................................................................................................... 229
Walking COS.................................................................................................................. 229
Walking Extension.......................................................................................................... 230
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode .......................................................................................... 231
Appendix ............................................................................................. 235
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Capacity of System Resources .................................................................................. 236
Tones/Ring Tones ........................................................................................................ 239
Revision History........................................................................................................... 241
PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxx ............................................................................ 241
PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx ............................................................................ 241
Feature Manual
9
2.3.3
2.3.4
PSMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx ............................................................................ 242
PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx ............................................................................ 242
Index .......................................................................................................... 245
10
Feature Manual
Section
1
Features and Configurations
Feature Manual
11
1.1 A
1.1
A
1.1.1
Absent Message
Description
Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other
extension users when they are called. These messages can explain the reason for their absence, and may
be edited through system programming and personal programming.
The following Absent Messages may be programmed:
Type
System
message
Message
No.
Message (Example)
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
3
At Ext %%%% (Extension
Number)
4
Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5
Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6
In a Meeting
Description
Messages may be edited through
system programming. They can be
used by any extension user.
7
8
Personal
message
9
A message is programmable by each
extension through personal
programming (Personal Absent
Message), which can only be used by
that extension user.
Note
The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual
extension.
Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.
Conditions
•
•
An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed
at the extension while on-hook.
The caller must use a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Absent Message Set / Cancel
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent Message
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent Message
12
Feature Manual
1.1 A
2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message
PT Programming Manual
[008] Absent Message
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.1 Absent Message
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.1.2
Account Code Entry
Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing CO line calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account
code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. For example, a firm can
use an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client, and can submit a
bill to the client according to the client's account code as shown on the SMDR call record.
There are two methods of entering account codes explained below.
One of the methods is selected for each extension based on Class of Service (COS) programming.
Mode
Description
Option
An extension user can enter an account code, but is not required to.
Forced
An extension user must always enter an account code before seizing
a CO line.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
An account code can be stored in Memory Dialing (One-touch Dialing, for example).
Account Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the
feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time,
while feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a CO line.
Extension users can enter an account code at any time during a call, including after the call has been
disconnected and a reorder tone is heard. However, if an account code is entered after there is no
longer a reorder tone, the call will not be stored in the SMDR record.
If an account code is entered more than once, the code entered last is logged in the SMDR.
Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialed without an account code. (→ 1.5.2
Emergency Call)
Proprietary telephone (PT) users can also enter an account code for incoming CO line calls during a
conversation.
Verification Code Entry
To identify who made a CO line call for accounting and billing purposes, a verification code can be used.
This code can be used at any extension. (→ 1.19.1 Verification Code Entry)
Feature Manual
13
1.1 A
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Account Code Entry
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Account Code Mode
PT Programming Manual
[508] Account Code Mode
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
1.1.3
ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Description
Different telephone carriers charge different rates for calls placed to different areas. Your PBX may use
different telephone carriers to make calls to different areas in an effort to reduce costs.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a feature which automatically selects different carriers each time a CO
line call is made. In order to use ARS effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell
the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers, during which time of day.
If you do not activate ARS, if ARS is bypassed, or if you do not use multiple carriers, CO line calls will be
connected via the carrier contracted for each line (default carrier).
14
Feature Manual
1.1 A
[Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart]
The numbers in parentheses indicate the corresponding items found under [Programming Procedures] on
the following pages.
An extension user accesses a CO
line and dials a telephone number.
Is the ARS mode (1) enabled?
No (Normal CO Line Access)
Sends the telephone
number as dialed.
Yes
Is the dialed number found in the
Leading Number Exception Table (2)?
Yes
No
Is the dialed number found in
the Leading Number Table (3)?
No
Yes
Checks the Routing Plan (4) to
determine which carrier to use.
Is the carrier found in the
appropriate time block (4)?
No
Yes
Is there an available
trunk group (5)?
Yes
Modifies the dialed number by
removing the digits and following
the modify commands (5).
No
Because all CO
lines are busy?
Yes
No
Is normal
CO Line Access
allowed?
Yes
(default)
No
Sends the modified number
to the CO line.
Sends a
busy tone.
Sends a
reorder tone.
Sends the telephone
number by the Idle
Line Access.
[Programming Procedures]
1. ARS Mode
ARS is turned on by selecting under which circumstances it operates – either when an extension user
makes a call using the Idle Line Access method, or when any CO Line Access method is used. (→
1.3.11 CO Line Access). ARS can also be turned off for the entire system.
→ 2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings—ARS Mode
→ [320] ARS Mode
2. Leading Number Exception Table
Once ARS is activated, store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS in the Leading Number
Exception Table.
Note that the first few digits (leading number) of a telephone number, such as an area code or local
exchange, can also be stored, so that all calls to those areas or exchanges are exempted from ARS.
Feature Manual
15
1.1 A
Also note that the CO Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be
programmed here.
Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected to the user-selected line, via the default carrier for that
line.
[Programming Example: ARS Leading Number Exception Table]
Leading No.
Exception *1
Location
No.
1
2
3
*1
555
556
567
→ 2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
→ [325] ARS Exception Number
In this example:
555, 556, and 567 are local exchanges. (555-XXXX, 556-XXXX, 567-XXXX)
These calls can be made using any carrier, and are therefore exempt from ARS.
3. Leading Number Table
Next, store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS, and assign a
Routing Plan to each leading number that will control how calls containing these leading numbers are
routed.
When an extension user dials a number which contains a leading number stored in the ARS Leading
Number Table, the call will be routed the corresponding Routing Plan assigned here. Note that the CO
Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here.
Before programming the details of each Routing Plan (explained below), you can simply assign here
the same Routing Plan number to all the different leading numbers which will be routed the same way.
If a dialed number matches two or more leading numbers stored in the ARS Leading Number Table, the
lowest numbered location will have priority.
[Programming Example: ARS Leading Number Table]
*1
*2
*3
Location
No.
Leading
No.*1
Additional
No. of Digits*2
Routing Plan
No.*3
1
2
3
1212
01181
01144
7
0
0
1
5
12
→ 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number—Leading Number
→ [321] ARS Leading Number
→ 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number—Additional Number of Digits
→ 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number—Routing Plan Number
→ [322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number
Additional Number of Digits
In order for calls to be made using the desired carrier, telephone numbers dialed by extension users
must be modified to meet the criteria required by the carrier. (Refer to 5. Carrier Table.) This
16
Feature Manual
1.1 A
modification usually involves removing digits and adding access codes to the beginning of the dialed
number.
In situations where a preprogrammed number (such as an Itemized Billing Code) must be added
automatically after the telephone number that was dialed by the extension user, set the Additional
Number of Digits to a value greater than 0.
4. Routing Plan
Since the preferred carrier may vary depending on the time of day, you can create an ARS-specific time
table and break each day of the week into different time blocks. A different carrier can then be assigned
to each time block.
Routing Plan Time Table: For each Routing Plan, a different carrier can be assigned for each time of
day and each day of the week. Each day can have up to four programmable time blocks.
Routing Plan Priority: For each Routing Plan, a different carrier can be assigned a different priority
for each time of day. Generally, the carrier assigned to priority 1 will be used, however, if the CO lines
assigned to this carrier are busy, a different available carrier will be used according to priority level.
ARS Leading Number Table
Location
No.
1
2
3
Leading
No.
1212
01181
01144
Additional No.
of Digits
7
0
0
Routing Plan
No.
1
5
12
ARS Routing Plan No. 1
Time Table*1
Monday
*1
*2
Time Block A
Time Block B
Time Block C
Time Block D
9:00
12:00
17:00
23:00
Priority 1
Carrier A
Carrier A
Carrier C
Carrier J
Carrier*2
Priority 2
Carrier M
Carrier M
Carrier M
Carrier M
→ 2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
→ [330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table
→ 2.14.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
→ [331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16)
5. Carrier Table
Each carrier must be programmed in the Carrier Table. Here each carrier is assigned a carrier number,
name, the CO lines it is used with, etc.
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier
Carrier Name: Assign a name for the carrier. Used only as a reference.
Trunk Group: Assign the trunk groups which can be used when making calls via this carrier.
Carrier Access Code: Enter the carrier's access code. Consult carrier for details.
Removed Number of Digits: There may be circumstances where the user-dialed number must be
modified in order for the carrier to connect the call. In this case, enter here the number of digits to be
removed automatically from the beginning of the dialed number.
Feature Manual
17
1.1 A
Modify Command: When a call is made using this carrier, the telephone number must be modified to
meet the criteria required by the carrier in order to connect the call. Program here the commands
needed to modify the user-dialed number as necessary.
[Command Explanation]
Description
Command
C
Inserts the Carrier Access Code
H
Inserts the user-dialed number minus any removed digits
P
Inserts a pause
A
Inserts the Authorization Code for Tenant
G
Inserts the Authorization Code for Trunk Group
I
Inserts the Itemized Billing Code
[0-9,
, #] You can enter any of these digits in a modify command
[Programming Example: Carrier Table]
Carrier 1
Carrier Name
Carrier A
Trunk Group*2
1, 2, 3
Carrier Access Code*3
0880
Removed No. of Digits*4
1
Modify Command*5
CH
*1
Carrier 2
Carrier J
4
0700
3
CPH
In this example
Dialed number: 9-1-212-555-5555
Modification:
9
1
2125555555
Remove 1 digit
CO Line Access no. is ignored
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
18
0880
2125555555
Add the Carrier Access Code
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—Carrier Name
→ [350] ARS Carrier Name
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—TRG 01–TRG 64
→ [351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—Carrier Access Code
→ [353] ARS Carrier Access Code
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—Removed Number of Digits
→ [352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—Modify Command
Feature Manual
1.1 A
6. ARS Options
Authorization Code for Tenant
A Carrier Authorization Code can be assigned to each tenant.
→ 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant
Authorization Code for Trunk Group
A Carrier Authorization Code can be assigned to each trunk group.
→ 2.14.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG
Itemized Billing Code
An Itemized Billing Code can be assigned for each extension and for each verification code.
If a call is not made from an extension, such as via Direct Inward System Access (DISA), and no
verification code is used, the Itemized Billing Code assigned to location 1 in the Verification Code Table
will be used.
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemized Code
→ 2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemized Code
→ 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Itemized Billing Code for ARS
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into
service.
Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they
are established will restrict the customer and the customer's employees from gaining access to the
network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
•
•
•
Logging Outgoing Calls by SMDR
Whether SMDR logs the user-dialed number or the ARS-modified number is determined through
system programming. (→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording))
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Options—ARS Dial
ARS Data Import/Export
ARS tables and data can be copied to and from the PBX and a PC using the KX-TAW848 Maintenance
Console software. Files are saved in CSV (Comma Separated Value) format. Because of the large
amounts of programming that may be necessary to use ARS effectively, you may choose to export ARS
tables and data to a PC, edit them using the software of your choosing, then import the new data to the
PBX. This is particularly convenient if you need to update your ARS tables for new area codes or
telephone rates, or when you'd like to copy ARS tables from one PBX to another.
→ 2.4.5 Tool—Import
→ 2.4.6 Tool—Export
TRS
Toll Restriction (TRS) checks are performed before ARS number modification, so program TRS Denied
Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly. (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction))
When ARS Routing Takes Place
ARS routing takes place after the preprogrammed number of digits (leading number + additional
number of digits) have been dialed.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
Feature Manual
19
1.1 A
2.4.5 Tool—Import
→ ARS - Leading Digit
→ ARS - Except Code
→ ARS - Routing Plan
2.4.6 Tool—Export
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3—Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemized Code
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemized Code
2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Itemized Billing Code for ARS
2.14 [8] ARS
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Options—ARS Dial
PT Programming Manual
[320] ARS Mode
[321] ARS Leading Number
[322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number
[325] ARS Exception Number
[330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table
[331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16)
[350] ARS Carrier Name
[351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access
[352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access
[353] ARS Carrier Access Code
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.1.4
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Description
If the line is busy when a call is made, a callback ring can inform the caller when the line becomes free.
If the called party was another extension, or if the dialed number is handled by Automatic Route Selection
(ARS), the number is automatically redialed after the extension user answers the callback ring.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
20
If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds, callback is canceled.
If the extension hears a busy tone before dialing the telephone number, only the CO line or trunk group
is reserved. After answering the callback ring, the extension should dial the telephone number.
An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy. The last setting is effective.
Multiple extension users can set this feature for the same CO line at the same time.
However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension.
Callback ringing will be sent to extensions in the order that the feature was set. In other words, the
extension that set the feature first will receive a callback ringing first.
Feature Manual
1.1 A
•
This feature cannot be used for calls to a Voice Processing System (VPS).
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Automatic Callback Busy
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
1.1.5
Automatic Extension Release
Description
After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the user
will hear a reorder tone. This operation applies to intercom calls only.
This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release.
Conditions
•
•
A proprietary telephone (PT)/portable station (PS) user hears a reorder tone for a preprogrammed time
period, and then the PT/PS returns to idle status automatically. A single line telephone (SLT) user will
hear a reorder tone until he or she goes on-hook.
This feature works in one of the following cases:
When making an intercom call
a) The first digit is not dialed within a preprogrammed time period.
b) A digit is dialed, but subsequent digits are not dialed within a preprogrammed time period.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Dial—Extension First Digit
→ Dial—Extension Inter-digit
→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual
21
1.1 A
1.1.6
Automatic Fax Transfer
Description
The PBX can distinguish between fax calls and other types of calls arriving on DISA lines, and automatically
transfer fax calls to preprogrammed destinations. When a call arrives on a DISA line, an OGM is played (→
1.12.1 OGM (Outgoing Message)). At the same time, the PBX begins fax signal detection. If a fax signal is
detected, the PBX recognizes that the call is a fax call, and transfers the call to the fax destination assigned
to that OGM through system programming. This allows a single CO line to be used seamlessly for both voice
and fax calls, with only voice calls arriving at user extensions.
[Available Automatic Fax Transfer Destinations]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
*
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
*:
A PS destination can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine. A virtual PS can be specified as the
destination of fax calls. Then, the extension number of the fax machine can be specified as the FWD—
ALL Calls destination for calls to that virtual PS. (→ 1.19.2 Virtual PS)
Conditions
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: An MSG card
This feature is only effective for calls arriving on DISA lines.
If a fax signal is not detected before the DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial timer expires, the call is
redirected to the operator extension, and fax detection ends.
Installation Manual References
2.5.3 MSG2 Card (KX-TAW84891)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
22
Feature Manual
1.1 A
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Fax Extension
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
1.1.7
Automatic Time Adjustment
Description
The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically in the following two ways:
1. Daylight Saving Time Setting
The start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time can be programmed. The PBX clock will automatically
adjust itself one hour forward or backward at 2:00 A.M. on the programmed date, if enabled through
system programming. At 2:00 A.M. on the start date, the clock will change to 3:00 A.M., and at 2:00
A.M. on the end date, the clock will change to 1:00 A.M.
Note
If a Timed Reminder (Remote Wake-up call) is set:
– On the Daylight Saving Time start date, a reminder set for between 2:00 A.M. and 3:00 A.M.
will not ring.
– On the Daylight Saving Time end date, a reminder set for between 1:00 A.M. and 2:00 A.M.
will ring twice.
2. Time Information from Telephone Company
Time information can be received when an incoming call through a CO line with Caller ID which includes
time information is received.
The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3:05 AM, if enabled through system
programming.
Note
If a Timed Reminder (Remote Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not ring or will ring twice
depending on the adjustment.
Conditions
•
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will log call information using the PBX clock so that the
logging time will be overlapped at the end of Daylight Saving Time. (→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message
Detail Recording))
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—Automatic Time Adjustment—by Caller ID (FSK)
PT Programming Manual
Feature Manual
23
1.1 A
None
Feature Manual References
1.17.3 Timed Reminder
24
Feature Manual
1.2 B
1.2
B
1.2.1
BGM (Background Music)
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while
on-hook and idle.
BGM—External:
BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pager (loudspeaker) and can be turned on
and off by an extension assigned as a manager.
Conditions
[BGM]
•
•
•
Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external audio source, such as a CD player or radio.
The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook.
Each user can only set/cancel BGM; the user cannot make a music selection.
[BGM—External]
•
•
Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager
The external pager can be used with the following priorities:
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) → Paging → BGM
(→ 1.13.1 Paging, 1.17.1 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station))
Installation Manual References
2.9.1 Connection of Peripherals
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ External BGM On / Off
→ BGM Set / Cancel
2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH—MOH—(Music On Hold)
2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
1.3.5 BGM (Background Music)
2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music)
Feature Manual
25
1.3 C
1.3
C
1.3.1
Caller ID
Description
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (a caller's name and telephone number) from calls received on
CO lines. This information can be shown on a proprietary telephone (PT) display when receiving a call and
can be used to direct calls from specific callers to specific destinations automatically. Additionally, Caller ID
information is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension which received the call, allowing the caller
to view a record of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later.
The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller's telephone number when it is received and, for example,
add a CO Line Access number or add/delete certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically.
This allows an extension user to be able to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call
log without worrying about CO Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
Notes
•
•
The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Manual refers to features that can receive caller
information sent from the telephone company and received on CO lines. Your network provider
may use a different name for this type of service.
To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service
and enable Caller ID for the appropriate CO line through system programming.
Caller ID to SLT Port:
Caller ID information can also be shown on a single line telephone (SLT) display. This feature is available
only for SLTs compatible with FSK-type Caller ID.
1. Caller ID-Related Features
Features
Description
Calling Line Identification Caller ID information received by the PBX is used to
(CLI) Distribution
direct calls from specific callers to specific
destinations. The caller's telephone number and a
destination must be assigned in the System Speed
Dialing Table.
Incoming Call Log
Details in
• 1.3.10 CLI
(Calling Line
Identification)
Distribution
Caller information is automatically recorded in the
• 1.3.3 Call Log,
call log of the extension which received the call. This Incoming
information can be used to view a record of incoming
calls or make calls to any number in the call log.
2. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
When a call is received, the PBX can automatically modify the caller's telephone number according to
a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number will be automatically
stored in the extension's Incoming Call Log, allowing the extension user to make a call to this number
later without worrying about CO Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
Each trunk group can be assigned a modification table. Each table has ten formulas for modifying local/
international numbers, and one formula for modifying long distance numbers. When a call is received,
the PBX compares the received telephone number to the area codes programmed under "Local/
26
Feature Manual
1.3 C
International Call Data" first. If a match is not found, the telephone number will be modified according
to the method programmed under "Long Distance Code".
[Programming Example: Caller ID Modification]
<Table Selection>
Trunk
Modification
Table
Group No.
1
1
3
2
<Modification Table>
Modification Table 1
Area Code
Local/International
212
Call Data 1
Local/International
011
Call Data 2
Removed No. of Digits Added No.
Local/International
Call Data 10
[Not
Long Distance
programmable]
Code Data
3
0
3
001
0
0
<Modification Flowchart>
A CO line call containing
Caller ID information is received.
Checks the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to the Trunk Group.
Yes
Is the caller's area code stored in
the Caller ID Modification Table?
No
Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the corresponding
"Local/International Call Data" field.
Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the "Long Distance
Code" field.
Example:
Removed number of digits: 3
Added number: 9
Example:
Removed number of digits: 0
Added number: 91
Example:
Received number: 212 555 1234
Example:
Received number: 313 555 1234
Modified number:
Modified number:
9 555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
91 313 555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
Feature Manual
27
1.3 C
3. System Speed Dialing Table
The System Speed Dialing Table can store telephone numbers, names, and CLI destinations for
hundreds of callers.
a) Telephone Number: Contains a CO Line Access number and the caller's telephone number.
If Automatic Caller ID Number Modification is used, telephone numbers should be stored in
the System Speed Dialing Table in their modified format in order for CLI distribution to function.
b) Caller's Name: Shown on the display and logged (Incoming Call Log, Station Message Detail
Recording [SMDR]) when a call from this telephone number is received.
c) CLI Destination: The destination to which an incoming call from the stored telephone number
is directed via the CLI distribution feature.
[Programming Example: System Speed Dialing Table]
*1
*2
*3
Location
(System Speed
Dialing No.)
System Speed
Dialing Name*1
Telephone No.*2
CLI Destination*3
000
ABC Company
912125551234
200
001
XYZ Company
913135551234
300
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ [001] System Speed Dialing Number
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—Name
→ [002] System Speed Dialing Name
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—CLI Destination
4. Displaying the Caller's Name
In addition to the System Speed Dialing Table, each extension can store names and numbers in
Personal Speed Dialing. Therefore, it is entirely possible for the same telephone number to be stored
under a different name in different locations within the PBX.
When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller's name in the
following order, then show that name on the display and log it via SMDR.
1) Personal Speed Dialing data of the extension which received the call
2) System Speed Dialing Table
3) The Caller ID information received from the telephone company
If a caller's name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed
or logged.
Conditions
[General]
•
Caller ID signaling type can be selected through system programming.
[Caller ID to SLT Port]
•
•
•
28
Hardware Requirement:
The EXT-CID card
When the caller's number is sent to an SLT, a CO Line Access number can be automatically added to
the telephone number through system programming for calling back.
Through system programming, a group of 4 SLT ports can be assigned to receive Caller ID information.
Up to 2 groups can be programmed. Therefore, a maximum of 8 SLTs can receive Caller ID information.
Feature Manual
1.3 C
•
•
•
•
•
When the caller's number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits, not counting the
preceding CO Line Access number (if it is programmed to be added).
If a call is transferred to an SLT, the transferring extension's information will be shown on the SLT. If the
transferring extension goes on-hook before the call is answered, the original caller's information will be
shown.
When Caller ID information such as "Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" is received, this
information will be shown instead of the caller's number and name.
Even if the caller's name is sent, the name may not be shown depending on the type of SLT.
Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
→ Caller ID—Waiting to receive
→ Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Caller-ID Modification Table
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7
→ Extension Caller ID
→ Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification
PT Programming Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
[490] Caller ID Signal Type
Feature Manual References
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
1.16.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
1.16.4 Speed Dialing, System
1.3.2
Call Hold
Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Hold features are available:
Feature
Description
Call Hold General
Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Call Hold
Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it.
The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD
button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and Exclusive Call Hold.
Feature Manual
29
1.3 C
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
30
Call Hold Limitation
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can hold one intercom call and/or multiple CO line calls at a time. A
single line telephone (SLT) user can hold either one intercom call or one CO line call at a time. By using
the Call Park feature, PT and SLT users can hold multiple CO line calls and intercom calls
simultaneously. (→ 1.3.5 Call Park)
Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the held party. (→ 1.11.4 Music on Hold)
Hold Recall
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the Hold Recall tone is heard at
the extension which put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be
heard.
If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period
after the Hold Recall time expires, the call is automatically disconnected.
Automatic Call Hold
A PT can be configured through system programming to place the current call on hold when the PT
user presses a CO, ICD Group, or INTERCOM button to make or answer another call. If this feature is
not enabled, the current call will be disconnected.
[Example of Automatic Call Hold]
It is possible to receive an incoming CO line call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button. The current
intercom call (on the INTERCOM button) is placed on hold. To return to the held call, press the
INTERCOM button.
Call Hold Retrieve Deny
Internal Call Block (→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block) also determines which extensions' calls an extension
user can retrieve, i.e., if extension 101 cannot call extension 201, then it cannot retrieve extension 201's
held calls either.
SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT through system programming. The
following methods are available:
Hold
Hold
(to be Retrieved from
Another Extension)*
Mode 1
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Mode 2
(Default)
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Feature Manual
Transfer to CO Line
Transfer to
Extension
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
CO Line Access No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
CO Line Access No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Extension No.
1.3 C
*:
Hold
Hold
(to be Retrieved from
Another Extension)*
Mode 3
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
CO Line Access No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Mode 4
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
CO Line Access No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Extension No.
Transfer to CO Line
Transfer to
Extension
These operations must be performed when the held call is intended to be retrieved from another
extension using the holding extension number.
If one of the following occurs frequently with an SLT, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4":
a) When an SLT user answers a call, a reorder tone is heard or no one is heard on the other end.
b) When an SLT user goes off-hook, a reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone.
•
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, choose
"Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is
entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and Mode 4.
Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default. (→ 2.2 Tones/Ring Tones)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Recall—Hold Recall
→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
→ Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
→ Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
→ Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
→ Option 1—PT Operation— Hold Key Mode
→ Option 5—SLT—SLT Hold Mode
PT Programming Manual
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature Manual
31
1.3 C
Operating Manual References
1.3.6 Call Hold
1.3.3
Call Log, Incoming
Description
When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the
telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller's identity. This information is also automatically
logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back.
Each extension and incoming call distribution (ICD) group has its own Incoming Call Log.
Call Log button
The Call Log button will alert an extension user to any missed (unanswered) calls. A flexible button can be
customized as the Call Log button, and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension or
corresponding ICD group, as shown below.
Light pattern
Status of the corresponding call log
Red on
There are call records in the log which have not been viewed.
Off
There are no new call records in the log.
John White
DEC.12 10:00AM MON
New: Not Answered
123456789
--- Caller's name (20 digits max.)
--- Date and time of a call received
--- Answering Status*
--- Caller's number (16 digits max.)
Call Log buttons
This extension
ICD Group
* "New" is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed;
"Old" is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed.
32
Feature Manual
1.3 C
Conditions
•
The following information is logged.
Telephone
1-line display PT
KX-TD7690/KX-TD7680
Information
3-line
display PT
Wireless phone
(KX-TD7895/KX-T7885)
Caller's Name or
Caller's Phone
Number*
Date/Time call
received
Answered or
Not Answered
Confirmed or
Not Confirmed
*:
•
•
•
If the caller's name is not logged, the caller's phone number is displayed.
If the caller's name is logged, the caller's phone number is not displayed.
If the answering destination is not the original extension (e.g., Call Pickup or FWD—No Answer), the
call is logged in the Incoming Call Logs of both the original and the answering destination. If a call is
forwarded to multiple extensions before being answered, the call is logged in the call logs of all the
extensions it was forwarded to. If a call is forwarded to an ICD group and is not answered, the call is not
logged in the call log for the ICD group.
Incoming Call Log for Calls to an ICD Group
If a call directed to an ICD group is not answered, the call is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the ICD
group. If the call is answered, it is logged in the call log of the answering extension only.
Through system programming, it is possible to select which Incoming Call Logs record call information
when a member of an ICD group answers a call to the group:
– Only the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call.
– Both the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call and that of the ICD Group.
Incoming Call Log for Calls to a PS
Each portable station (PS) also has an Incoming Call Log. When a call is directed to a PS, the call will
be logged in the call log of the PS even when:
a) The PS is out of range.
b) The PS is turned off.
c) The Cell Station (CS) is busy.
•
•
Display Lock
The Incoming Call Log of an extension can be locked through personal programming (Directory and
Call Log Lock) to prevent other users from viewing its contents. In this case, the Outgoing Call Log
display, the Personal Speed Dialing number display and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the
voice messages in the user's message box cannot be played back.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (→ 1.5.6 Extension
PIN (Personal Identification Number))
Incoming Call Log Memory
The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited. The maximum number of
calls that can be logged in the Incoming Call Log of each extension and ICD group can be specified
through system programming. When a call log is full, the oldest call will be replaced each time a call is
received.
Feature Manual
33
1.3 C
•
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers
will be logged in the Incoming Call Log.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD—Incoming Call
Log Memory
2.9.11 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—Call Log to ICD Group for
Answered Call
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→ Option 5—Incoming Call Display
→ Option 6—Incoming Call Log Memory
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→ Option 5—Incoming Call Display
→ Option 6—Incoming Call Log Memory
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.3.1 Caller ID
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.16.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.4.2 Call Log, Incoming
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.3.4
Call Monitor
Description
Allows an extension user to listen to a busy extension user's existing conversation. The user can hear the
conversation but will not be heard. If desired, the monitoring user can interrupt the call to establish a threeparty conference call.
Conditions
•
•
34
Class of Service (COS) programming determines extension users who can use this feature.
This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or
outside party.
Feature Manual
1.3 C
•
This feature will not function when the busy extension:
a) Has set Executive Busy Override Deny (→ 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override) or Data Line Security
(→ 1.4.1 Data Line Security).
b) Is on a conference call (→ 1.3.13 Conference, → 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override, → 1.13.10
Privacy Release).
c) Is on a doorphone call (→ 1.4.10 Doorphone Call).
d) Is using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
e) Has a call on consultation hold (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)).
•
This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation
(→ 1.6.1 Fixed Buttons, → 1.6.3 Flexible Buttons):
– FLASH/RECALL button
– HOLD button
– TRANSFER button
– CONF (Conference) button
– DSS button
– EFA button
– Two-way Record button
– Two-way Transfer button
– One-touch Two-way Transfer button
– Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Call Monitor
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Call Monitor
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→ Option 2—Data Mode
→ Option 3—Executive Override Deny
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.7 Call Monitor
Feature Manual
35
1.3 C
1.3.5
Call Park
Description
An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX. The Call Park feature can be
used as a transferring feature; this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. A
parked call can be retrieved by any extension user.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Call Park
It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically.
Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park, the
originator will hear a busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing a busy tone by selecting another
parking zone or a vacant zone.
Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the Call Park Recall tone will be
heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call. If the
destination is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
If a parked CO line call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is
automatically disconnected.
Call Park Button
Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone.
Any flexible button can be customized as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset
parking zone as follows:
Light pattern
•
•
Status
Slow red flashing
A call is parked in the preset parking zone
Off
There are no parked calls
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Button
Pressing the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically.
Any flexible button can be customized as the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
Call Park Retrieve Deny
Internal Call Block (→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block) also determines which extensions' calls an extension
user can retrieve from a parking zone, i.e., if extension 101 cannot call extension 201, then it cannot
retrieve extension 201's parked calls either.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→ Recall—Call Park Recall
→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
36
Feature Manual
1.3 C
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.6 Call Hold
1.3.6
Call Pickup
Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension.
The following types of Call Pickup are available:
Type
Description
Directed
A specified extension's call is answered.
Group
A call within a specified call pickup group is answered.
Call Pickup Deny
An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension.
Conditions
•
•
Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom, CO line, and doorphone calls
Internal Call Block
An extension which cannot call certain extensions based on Class of Service (COS) programming (→
1.9.12 Internal Call Block) also cannot pick up calls ringing at those extensions.
[Directed Call Pickup]
•
A user can also pick up a call to a specified extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button. This
feature is only available when DSS buttons for extensions or incoming call distribution (ICD) groups
Feature Manual
37
1.3 C
have this feature enabled through system programming, and the light pattern of DSS buttons for
incoming calls to extensions or ICD groups is set to "On or Flash" through system programming.
The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)
group can be programmed through system programming. Call Pickup is available only when the DSS
button is red flashing.
[Group Call Pickup]
•
A specified number of call pickup groups can be created, each of which consists of extension user
groups. One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (→ 1.7.1 GROUP
FEATURES)
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1
Call Pickup Group 2
Call Pickup Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Group Call Pickup
→ Directed Call Pickup
→ Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4
→ DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call
→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
2.9.4 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
PT Programming Manual
[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.9 Call Pickup
38
Feature Manual
1.3 C
1.3.7
Call Splitting
Description
During a conversation, an extension user can call another extension while putting the original party on
Consultation Hold. The extension user can then alternate between the two parties and/or connect the
original party with the third party.
Conditions
•
When the extension user is having a conversation with one party, the other party is in consultation hold.
(→ 1.3.15 Consultation Hold)
Operating Manual References
1.3.10 Call Splitting
1.3.8
Call Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are
available:
Feature
Transferring method
With Announcement
Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination
party.
Without Announcement
Transfer is completed without an announcement.
After dialing the transfer destination, the originator can replace the
handset once a ringback tone is heard.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.
Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
When an extension is transferring a party to another destination, the party will be in consultation hold
until they reach the transfer destination. (→ 1.3.15 Consultation Hold)
If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is being transferred. (→
1.11.4 Music on Hold) It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent to the caller.
If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the
outside party. (→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an
outside party.
Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the call will
be redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call. If
a Transfer Recall destination is not assigned, the call will return to the extension.
Feature Manual
39
1.3 C
[Available destination for Transfer Recall]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
•
Automatic Transfer by DSS Button
Pressing a DSS button during a conversation with an extension or outside party can automatically
transfer the call to the specified destination. It is possible through system programming to prevent this
feature operating for extension to extension calls.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—Transfer Recall
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—Transfer to CO
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Transfer Recall Destination
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Transfer Recall Destination
PT Programming Manual
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[712] Music for Transfer
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.11 Call Transfer
40
Feature Manual
1.3 C
1.3.9
Call Waiting Tone
Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a
conversation), a call waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting. The
tone can be heard from either the handset or the built-in speaker. The busy extension user can answer the
second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
Call Waiting can be enabled or disabled for intercom calls and CO line calls separately. Note that doorphone
calls and CO line calls transferred from another extension or received via an incoming call distribution group
are treated as CO line calls.
Call Waiting is also known as Busy Station Signaling (BSS).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This feature functions only if the called extension has activated call waiting. If it is activated, the calling
extension will hear a ringback tone.
One of two call waiting tones can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call
Waiting Tone Type Selection).
A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for CO line calls and intercom calls if "Tone 2" has
been selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). If "Tone 1" has been
selected, the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both CO line calls and intercom calls.
All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default (→ 2.2 Tones/Ring Tones).
Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group (DPT/DTMF) is not available.
Automatic Call Waiting
Through system programming, it is possible to select whether a call waiting tone is automatically sent
to the extension when receiving CO line calls, doorphone calls, external sensor calls and hold-recall
calls. Through system programming, it is also possible to select whether extensions will receive
Automatic Call Waiting from intercom calls.
Data Line Security
Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. (→ 1.4.1 Data Line Security)
Caller Information
With the Call Waiting tone, the caller's information flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by
a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered from the telephone
company informs the extension user of another incoming CO line call that is waiting. He can answer the
second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold using EFA. For details, consult your
telephone company.
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
When using the call waiting tone supplied by the telephone company, the waiting caller's telephone
number and name can be received. Either the name or the number will flash on the display for five
seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flash again for five seconds.
Note that the received caller information will not be displayed on telephones or wireless phones
connected to SLT ports.
Call waiting tone is available when the called extension is having a conversation with another party. If
the extension is not having a conversation but is unavailable to receive the notification (dialing a
number, for example), the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes
available. Even while waiting, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.
If call waiting tone is not set at the called party, the caller will hear a reorder tone after trying to send a
call waiting notification.
Feature Manual
41
1.3 C
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.7 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property—Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Call Waiting Mode: Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
→ Call Waiting Mode: Automatic Call Waiting
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / DND Override
→ BSS / DND Override-2
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→ Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→ Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
→ Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→ Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→ Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
→ Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.3.10 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
Description
Directs an incoming CO line call to a specific destination when the caller's telephone number matches a
number in the System Speed Dialing Table. Each telephone number in this table can be assigned its own
Calling Line Identification (CLI) destination.
CLI distribution allows you to direct calls from specific people to specific destinations, and has many
applications. For example, you can program the PBX to automatically connect calls from priority clients to
their sales representatives, or automatically connect mobile phone calls from an executive to his or her
assistant.
In order for CLI distribution to function, the PBX must receive Caller ID information from the telephone
company.
CLI distribution works in conjunction with Direct In Line (DIL) distribution; it can be enabled or disabled for
each time mode assigned on each CO line.
When a call has Caller ID information and CLI distribution is enabled for the current time mode, CLI
distribution will direct the call to its destination, ignoring preprogrammed DIL destinations.
42
Feature Manual
1.3 C
[Programming Example: System Speed Dialing Table]
*1:
*2:
*3:
Location
(System Speed
Dialing No.)
System Speed
Dialing Name*1
Telephone No.*2
CLI Destination*3
000
ABC Company
912125551234
200
001
XYZ Company
913135551234
300
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—Name
→ [001] System Speed Dialing Number
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ [002] System Speed Dialing Name
→ 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—CLI Destination
In this example:
If the caller's telephone number is "1-212-555-1234":
1) The PBX looks for the number in the System Speed Dialing Table. (The CO Line Access number,
"9", is disregarded.) The number is found in location 000.
2) If CLI distribution is enabled in the current time mode for the CO line carrying the call (for DIL
distribution), the call is routed to its CLI destination, extension 200.
Conditions
•
If Automatic Caller ID Modification is used:
Store the modified number in the System Speed Dialing Table.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→ Name
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ CLI Destination
2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
PT Programming Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
Feature Manual References
1.3.1 Caller ID
1.4.5 DIL (Direct In Line)
1.9.8 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
1.16.4 Speed Dialing, System
Feature Manual
43
1.3 C
1.3.11 CO Line Access
Description
There are three methods of accessing a CO line.
Method
Description
Operation
Idle Line Access
(Local Access)
Selects an idle CO line automatically Dial the Idle Line Access number or
from the assigned trunk groups.
press a L-CO button.
Trunk Group Access
Selects an idle CO line from the
corresponding trunk group.
Dial the Trunk Group Access number and
a trunk group number, or press a G-CO
button.
S-CO Line Access
Selects the desired CO line directly.
Dial the S-CO Line Access number and
the CO line number, or press the S-CO
button.
Conditions
•
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls.
CO Line numbers can be referred on a CO line port basis.
Button Assignment
A flexible button can be customized as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows:
Type
Assignable parameter
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Any trunk group that is made available for Idle Line Access through
system programming is applied.
Group-CO (G-CO)
A trunk group is assigned.
Single-CO (S-CO)
A specified CO line is assigned.
It is possible to assign:
– the same CO line to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button.
– the same trunk group to more than one G-CO button.
– more than one L-CO button.
•
•
•
44
Dialing the CO Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority: S-CO → GCO → L-CO
Direct CO Line Access
If an extension user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the proprietary telephone (PT)
automatically enables hands-free operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or
pressing the SP-PHONE button or MONITOR button.
Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access
An idle CO line is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access. If multiple trunk groups
are available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming.
CO Line Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access
The CO line hunting sequence in a trunk group (from lowest numbered CO line, from highest numbered
CO line or rotation) can be determined through system programming.
Feature Manual
1.3 C
•
•
A company name or customer name can be assigned on a CO line port basis so that the operator or
extension user who is answering the call can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach
before answering. This is useful, for example, when multiple companies share the same operator.
It is possible to identify the CO line port that has a CO line connected to it. This prevents extension users
from originating a call to a CO line which is not connected.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Connection
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Connection
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)
→ Trunk Group Access
→ Single CO Line Access
2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings—ARS Mode
2.15.1 [9-1] CO Line Settings—CO Name
PT Programming Manual
[400] LCOT CO Line Connection
[401] LCOT CO Line Name
[409] LCOT CO Line Number Reference
[500] Trunk Group Number
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
Feature Manual
45
1.3 C
1.3.12 CO Line Call Limitation
Description
CO line calls are limited by the following features:
Feature
Description
Extension-to-CO Line Call
Duration
If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established,
the call duration can be restricted by the system timer selected for
each trunk group. Both parties will hear warning tones at five-second
intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit. When the time limit
expires, the line will be disconnected. COS programming determines
whether this feature is enabled or disabled. Whether this feature
applies to outgoing calls only, or to both outgoing and incoming calls is
determined through system programming.
CO-to-CO Line Call (except
Unattended Conference Call)
Duration
If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration
can be restricted by the system timer selected for each trunk group.
Both parties will hear warning tones at five-second intervals starting 15
seconds before the time limit. When the time limit expires, the line will
be disconnected.
If both parties involved in the CO-to-CO line call were established by
an extension (e.g., an extension makes a CO line call, then transfers
the call to an outside party), the time limit applied to the CO line call
that was made first will be used.
Dialing Digit Restriction during While engaged in an incoming CO line call, the dialing of digits can be
Conversation
restricted. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the limitation, the line
will be disconnected.
Conditions
•
•
During an Unattended Conference Call, the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied. (→ 1.3.13
Conference)
When using LCO lines that do not support Calling Party Control (CPC) signal detection (→ 1.3.17 CPC
(Calling Party Control) Signal Detection), the CO-to-CO Line Call Duration timer should not be disabled,
as automatic end of call detection cannot be performed.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
→ CO-CO Duration Time
→ Extension-CO Duration Time
2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
PT Programming Manual
[472] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration
[473] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration
[502] CO Line Call Duration Limitation
46
Feature Manual
1.3 C
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.3.13 Conference
Description
An extension user can establish a conference call by adding additional parties to an already existing twoparty conversation. This PBX supports three-party through eight-party conference calls. Conferences with
more than four parties are only possible when a PT user originates the conference.
Unattended Conference:
The conference originator can leave the conference and allow other parties to continue. Establishing an
Unattended Conference allows the originator to return to the conference. Unattended Conferences can only
be established by PT users.
Conditions
•
•
•
When an extension is establishing a conference call the original party is put on hold.
CONF (Conference) Button
For a PT which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customized as the Conference
button.
Unattended Conference Call Duration
The length of time that a conference call can remain unattended is restricted by the following timers:
– Callback Start Timer
– Warning Tone Start Timer
– Disconnect Timer
These timers behave and operate according to the following chain of events:
1) When the unattended conference is established, the Callback Start Timer will begin.
2) When the Callback Start timer expires, the Unattended Conference originator’s extension will start
to receive a callback ringing from the PBX and the Warning Tone Start Timer begins.
3) When the Warning Tone Start Timer expires, the remaining parties of the conference will start to
hear a warning tone, the callback ringing will continue to be heard at the Unattended Conference
originator’s extension, and the Disconnect Timer begins.
4) When the disconnect Timer expires, the conference is disconnected.
If the Unattended Conference originator returns to the conference before the line is disconnected, all
timers are cleared.
•
For a Conference With Six or More Parties
The ECHO card is required. Also the echo canceling function should be enabled through system
programming.
Installation Manual References
2.5.2 ECHO8 Card (KX-TAW84866)
Feature Manual
47
1.3 C
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
→ Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
→ Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—Transfer to CO
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
→ Echo Cancel—Conference
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.15 Conference
1.3.14 Confirmation Tone
Description
At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation
tone to extension users.
Type
Tone 1
Description
a) Sent when the setting is accepted.
b) Sent when a call is received in voice-calling mode (Alternate
Receiving—Ring/Voice). The caller's voice will be heard after the
tone.
Tone 2
a) Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being
paged.
b) Sent when a call is received while an extension is in Hands-free
Answerback mode.
48
Feature Manual
1.3 C
Type
Tone 3-1
Description
a) Sent before a conversation is established using the Paging
feature.
b) Sent to the caller when a conversation is established with an
extension in one of the following modes:
•
Hands-free Answerback mode
•
Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice)
c) Sent when making a call to or from a doorphone.
Tone 3-2
Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the
following features by their feature numbers:
•
Call Park Retrieve
•
Call Pickup
•
Hold Retrieve
•
Paging Answer
•
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Tone 4-1
Sent when a call changes from a two-party call to a three-party call
(e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Twoway Record).
Tone 4-2
Sent when a call changes from a three-party call to a two-party call
(e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Twoway Record).
Tone 5
Sent when a call is placed on hold (including a consultation hold).
Conditions
•
•
Confirmation Tone Patterns
All confirmation tone patterns have a default (→ 2.2 Tones/Ring Tones).
It is possible to eliminate each tone.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after making call
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after answering call
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual
49
1.3 C
1.3.15 Consultation Hold
Description
Consultation Hold is a condition that a party is in, when an extension is calling other parties in order to
perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting. When the operation is completed or canceled, the
consultation hold is released.
In Consultation Hold, the original call is treated as if it is on hold, allowing the extension to call a third party
all on one line. In Call Hold, the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using
separate lines.
Feature Manual References
1.3.7 Call Splitting
1.3.8 Call Transfer
1.3.13 Conference
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Description
Each extension must belong to a Class of Service (COS). By assigning certain extensions to a COS, it is
possible to control the behavior and privileges of extension users (allowing or denying certain extensions
access to various features, extensions, and CO lines) depending on the duties appointed to them.
Many extensions can belong to the same COS by assigning each extension the same COS number,
allowing the same restrictions and privileges to apply to a group of extensions.
The following features are controlled on a COS basis:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
50
→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block
→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
→ 1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb)—DND Override
→ 1.1.2 Account Code Entry
→ 1.3.11 CO Line Access
→ 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override
→ 1.3.4 Call Monitor
→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)
→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock
→ 1.20.1 Walking COS
→ 1.3.12 CO Line Call Limitation
→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer
→ 1.4.9 Door Open
→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
→ 1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)—SMDR for Outgoing CO Line Calls
→ 1.17.4 Time Service—Time Service Switching
Feature Manual
1.3 C
r) → 1.11.1 Manager Features
s) → 1.13.15 PT Programming
Conditions
•
Walking COS
Extension users can make a call from extensions of a less-privileged COS by using their own COS
temporarily. (→ 1.20.1 Walking COS)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
PT Programming Manual
2.1.8 COS Programming
[602] Class of Service
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.3.17 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
Description
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an analog CO
line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilization of CO lines, the PBX monitors each line's
status and when CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension
with a reorder tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming CO line calls, and for outgoing CO line calls.
If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable CPC signal
detection on outgoing CO line calls.
If CPC signal is detected during a conference call (→ 1.3.13 Conference), the line is disconnected. The
remaining parties stay connected.
If CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
feature (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)) and an extension or an outside party, the line is
disconnected.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
PT Programming Manual
Feature Manual
51
1.3 C
[413] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing
[414] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming
52
Feature Manual
1.4 D
1.4
D
1.4.1
Data Line Security
Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party
is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. Extensions which
have devices connected to them such as modems or fax machines may set this feature to maintain secure
data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Data Line Security Set / Cancel
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Data Mode
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
1.3.17 Data Line Security
1.4.2
Dial Mode Selection
Description
The dialing mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each CO line through system programming regardless
of the originating extension (under contract with the telephone company).
Mode
Description
DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency)
Numbers dialed by an extension user are transmitted to the CO line
using analog tones.
Pulse Dial (Rotary)
Numbers dialed by an extension user are transmitted to the CO line
using analog pulses.
Conditions
•
•
Pulse to Tone Conversion
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to
access special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. To
switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period (Default: 5 seconds) after the CO line is
connected, or press . This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be
changed to Pulse mode.
It is possible to select a pulse rate for the CO line port which has been set to Pulse mode. There are
two pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).
Feature Manual
53
1.4 D
•
It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the CO line port which has
been set to DTMF mode.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port
→ Dialing Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ Pulse Speed
PT Programming Manual
[410] LCOT Dialing Mode
[411] LCOT Pulse Rate
[412] LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration
1.4.3
Dial Tone
Description
The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions:
Each dial tone type has two frequencies, such as dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B.
Type
Tone 1A/1B
Description
A normal dial tone is heard when:
a) No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set, or
b) Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is used.
Tone 2A/2B
54
Feature Manual
This tone is heard when:
•
There are messages that have previously been listened to and no new
messages on the SVM card.*
•
Any of the features below are set.
•
Absent Message
•
BGM
•
Call Forwarding (FWD)
•
Call Pickup Deny
•
Call Waiting
•
Do Not Disturb (DND)
•
Extension Dial Lock
•
Executive Busy Override Deny
•
Hot Line
•
Timed Reminder
1.4 D
Type
Description
Tone 3A/3B
This tone is heard when:
•
A called PS is being searched for.
•
The recording time used by the Simplified Voice Message (SVM)feature
reaches the limit.*
•
Any of the features below are performed.
•
Account Code Entry
•
Consultation Hold
•
Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message
Tone 4A/4B
This tone is heard when new messages have been recorded for the
extension.
*: Active even when distinctive dial tones are disabled.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Dial Tone Type A/B
Through system programming, it is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4. If
"Type A" is selected, all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A.
The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "Type A" is selected for ARS, dial
tone 1A will be heard. If "Type B" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard.
Distinctive Dial tone
Distinctive dial tones can be disabled. When disabled, dial tone 1 will be heard in all cases except those
marked with "*" in the table above.
Dial Tone Patterns
All dial tone patterns have a default (→ 2.2 Tones/Ring Tones).
Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in a VM (DPT/DTMF) group. (→ 1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
→ Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
PT Programming Manual
None
1.4.4
Dial Tone Transfer
Description
An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS level (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)) for an
extension user temporarily. After that, the extension user can make his call.
Feature Manual
55
1.4 D
[Example]
A hotel guest calls the front desk and asks for the telephone's toll restriction to be lifted in order to make an
international call.
(3) Make a CO line call
(2) Change
TRS level
Toll Restriction
button
(1) Call
Guest Room
(CO line call
restricted)
Front Desk
(Extension assigned
as a manager)
Conditions
•
•
The modified TRS level only applies to the next one call placed at the user's extension.
Toll Restriction Button
A manager extension must store the TRS level granted by the Dial Tone Transfer beforehand, when
assigning a flexible button as the Toll Restriction button.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→Type
→Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→Type
→Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→Type
→Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
2.1.1 Dial Tone Transfer
56
Feature Manual
1.4 D
1.4.5
DIL (Direct In Line)
Description
Directs an incoming CO line call to a preprogrammed destination based on the CO line carrying the call.
Each CO line has a destination for each time mode.
[Method Flowchart]
A CO line call is received.
Does the call have
Caller ID information and is CLI
distribution enabled for the CO line in
the current time mode?
No
Yes
Yes
Has the caller
been stored in the System Speed
Dialing Table and has a CLI destination
been assigned?
No
No
Is a DIL destination assigned
for the current time mode?
Yes
The call is routed to its
CLI destination.
The call is routed to the
DIL destination.
The call is routed to an
operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
[Programming Example: DIL Table]
The table can be programmed for each CO line.
Port No.
(CO Line No.)
*:
CLI Distribution
Day
Lunch
Break
DIL Destination*
Night
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
01
Enable Disable Enable Disable
101
100
101
100
02
Enable Disable Disable Disable
102
100
102
100
→ 2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ [450] DIL 1:1 Destination
In this example:
If a CO line call is received on CO line 01:
Feature Manual
57
1.4 D
In day mode: Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is enabled. The call is routed to its CLI destination,
if assigned. If not assigned, the call is routed to the Direct In Line (DIL) destination, extension 101.
In lunch mode: CLI distribution is disabled. The call is routed to the DIL destination, extension 100.
Note
Tenant numbers and VPS trunk group numbers (not shown here) can also be programmed in the DIL
Table.
The tenant number programmed here is used only to determine the Time Table used by each CO line;
selecting tenant 3 means the CO line will use Time Table 3, for example. The VPS trunk group number
set here is used to determine the Incoming Call Service and greeting message used by the Voice
Processing System (VPS) during the current time mode. (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
Conditions
•
To use this feature, DIL must be assigned as the distribution method for the desired CO line port.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
→ DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Tenant Number
→ VM Trunk Group
PT Programming Manual
[450] DIL 1:1 Destination
Feature Manual References
1.3.10 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
1.9.8 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
1.17.4 Time Service
1.4.6
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Description
An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user in the PBX, when
the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The
caller can have direct access to features such as:
•
Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for
remote system administration, an external pager for TAFAS).
•
Calling an outside party via the PBX.
•
Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD)
58
Feature Manual
1.4 D
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside party is received.
No
Is there an idle port on an MSG card?
Yes
The call is routed to an operator,
etc. (DISA Intercept when All
DISA Ports are busy)
(DISA Delayed
Answer time expires)
The PBX answers the call.
(DISA Mute & OGM Start Time
after Answering expires)
A
The OGM plays and the PBX starts to
receive the DTMF signaling.
F
No
Is the first digit dialed?
(DISA First Digit Time
When No Dial expires)
What method is assigned for
DISA Intercept Routing No Dial?
Operator
The call is routed to an
operator.
Yes
Disable
The call is
disconnected.
AA-0, AA-9
The call is redirected to
the destination assigned
to AA-0 or AA-9.
The OGM stops.
C
C
No
Is a second digit dialed?
(DISA Second Digit Time for
Automated Attendant expires)
Yes
No
The PBX receives the dialed
digits and checks the dialed
number.
Is the first dialed digit assigned a
destination for the DISA AA service?
Yes
The call is routed to the destination.
What is the DISA security mode?
Continued on next page
Feature Manual
59
1.4 D
Continued from previous page
No Security
None
CO Line Security
B
All Security
Is the dialed number
an extension number or
floating extension number?
No
Yes
Is the Walking COS/Verification
Code Entry feature number dialed?
C
What is the dialed number?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the correct
PIN entered?
Extension No./
Floating
Extension No.
Feature No.*
(Absent Message,
FWD, etc.)
CO Line Access No.
+ Telephone No.
The feature is set.
Other
No
D
B
Reorder tone
D
The dialed number is sent to the CO line.
C
Does the caller press
while hearing the reorder
tone (Call Retry)?
No
Is the extension
in DND mode?
Is the extension
busy?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
(DISA Reorder
Tone time
expires)
A
No
E
The call is directed to the extension.
The caller hears a ringback tone.
Is Call Waiting
mode on?
No
The call is disconnected.
Yes
No
Does the caller press
while hearing a ringback
tone (Call Retry)?
E
Yes
Does the
destination
answer
the call?
A
No
Yes
The call is established.
(DISA Intercept
time expires)
The call is routed to the
intercept destination.
(DISA Intercept Routing
No Answer)
G
Does the destination
answer the call?
Yes
Continued on next page
The call is established.
No
(DISA Disconnect
Time after
Intercept expires)
The call is disconnected.
* Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used.
60
Feature Manual
Continued on next page
1.4 D
Continued from previous page
Continued from previous page
What method is assigned
for DISA Intercept
Routing DND?
Intercept Routing
Is an Intercept
Routing Busy destination
assigned?
Busy tone
Yes
The call is routed to
the intercept destination.
(Intercept Routing Busy)
OGM
No
No
press
(Busy Tone /
DND Tone
Continuation
time expires)
The call is disconnected.
Does the caller
while hearing a busy
tone (Call Retry)?
Is a DISA Busy
Message assigned?
No
G
Yes
The message for
the DND mode is
sent to the caller.
A
The call is routed to
the intercept destination.
(Intercept Routing DND)
Yes
The message for
busy is sent to the
caller.
Busy tone
F
F
No
G
press
(Busy Tone /
DND Tone
Continuation
time expires)
The call is disconnected.
Does the caller
while hearing a busy
tone (Call Retry)?
Yes
A
DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial
If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept) after
hearing the outgoing message (OGM), one of the following can be selected through system programming:
a) Disable: The call will be terminated.
b) Operator: The call will be redirected to the operator.
c) AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
→ [211] DISA Intercept Time
→ 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after
DISA answers
DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service)
After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The
destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other
DISA floating extension numbers as the destination (Multistep DISA AA Service).
If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA), the DISA
AA service is not employed.
→ 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Feature Manual
61
1.4 D
Outgoing Message (OGM)
When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller.
Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). (→ 1.12.1 OGM
(Outgoing Message))
[Programming Example]
*1:
*2:
*3:
Outgoing
Message
(OGM) No.
Floating Extn.
No.*1
01
501
02
502
:
:
Automated Attendant No.*2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205
Busy/DND
Message No.*3
04
05
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
→ 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating Extension Number
→ [730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
→ 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial
0–9
→ 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Busy / DND Message No.
DISA Security Mode and Available Features
If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature
numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security.
→ 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
→ [732] DISA Security Mode
The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows:
Security Mode
Intercom Call
CO Line Call
All Security
CO Line Security
No Security
*:
*
: Available
If CO line call is available, Account Code Entry (→ 1.1.2 Account Code Entry) is also available.
Note
DISA AA service and Operator Call (→ 1.12.3 Operator Features) are available for any security mode.
Security Mode Override by Verification Code Entry
If the caller performs Verification Code Entry (→ 1.19.1 Verification Code Entry) while hearing a DISA
message, the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode.
Entry method:
Verification Code Entry feature number + + verification code + verification code PIN
After changing mode, the new mode remains in force for the duration of the call.
62
Feature Manual
1.4 D
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy
If the first destination called by the outside party is busy, the call is redirected as follows:
a) The call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned to the first destination.
b) If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not assigned to the first destination and a prerecorded
DISA Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear the DISA Busy Message.
c) If neither an intercept destination nor a DISA Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear a busy
tone.
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—Intercept Destination—
When Called Party is Busy
DISA Intercept Routing—DND
If the destination called by the outside party is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available,
one of the following can be selected through system programming:
a) Busy Tone: The caller will hear a busy tone.
b) Intercept: DND will redirect the call to the preprogrammed destination on an extension basis.
c) OGM: An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller. The message for DND mode can be
assigned for each outgoing message (OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number.
→ 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—DISA Intercept—Intercept when Destination through
DISA sets DND
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer
If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Intercept
time) after the call is reached, the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept
feature.
If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA
Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected.
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When called
party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ 2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When called
party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ [604] Extension Intercept Destination
Walking COS Through DISA
If the caller performs Walking COS (extension number and PIN entry) while hearing a DISA message, the
security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode (→ 1.20.1 Walking COS). After performing
Walking COS, the following features are available, using the settings of the specified extension:
•
Intercom call
•
CO line call
•
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (→ 1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb), → 1.6.6
FWD (Call Forwarding))
•
Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (→ 1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
•
Absent Message setting (→ 1.1.1 Absent Message)
•
Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock)
Feature Manual
63
1.4 D
•
Time Service Switching Mode (→ 1.17.4 Time Service)
SMDR
The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers. (→ 1.16.1
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording))
Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the CO-to-CO Line Call feature of
DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a)
b)
c)
d)
•
•
•
•
•
64
Enabling DISA security (CO Line Security or All Security).
Keeping passwords (verification code PINs/extension PINs) secret.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
Changing PINs regularly.
Hardware Requirement:
An MSG card
DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a
preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM).
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—Recall—Hold Recall
→ [209] DISA Delayed Answer Time
Call Retry
While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ". System
programming selects whether pressing " " during a CO-to-CO line conversation returns to the DISA
top menu or sends a DTMF tone.
DISA Mute Time
It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive
the DTMF signaling after the caller reaches the DISA line.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer
after Answering
End of Call Detection
If a call through DISA is routed to a CO line, DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. This function
can be disabled through system programming. If disabled, DISA is released when the CO-to-CO line
connection is made.
The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a CO-toCO line call via DISA.
– Silence Detection
→ 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—DISA Tone Detection—Silence
→ [475] DISA Silence Detection
– Continuous Signal Detection
→ 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
→ [476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection
– Cyclic Signal Detection
Feature Manual
1.4 D
•
•
•
•
•
→ 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
→ [477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Limitation
For a call between two outside parties, even if end of call detection cannot be performed, the call can
be disconnected by a system timer. (→ 1.3.12 CO Line Call Limitation) If the timer expires, the line will
be disconnected unless the originating caller extends the time by sending any DTMF signaling. The
caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period and preprogrammed number
of times.
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
→ [210] DISA CO-to-CO Line Call Prolong Time
DISA Reorder Tone Duration
It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. This specifies the length of time that a reorder
tone will be sent to the caller. When the timer expires, the call will be disconnected. Call Retry is
possible during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Call Deny
Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis.
→ 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Accept the Call from DISA
Verification Code PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a
preprogrammed number of times successively, that extension or verification code will become locked,
and even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it. Only an extension assigned as the manager can
unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
Each outgoing message (OGM) can be assigned a name through system programming for
programming reference.
→ 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Name
→ [731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
Installation Manual References
2.5.3 MSG2 Card (KX-TAW84891)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
→ DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after Answering
→ DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
→ DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
→ DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
→ DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
→ DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Feature Manual
65
1.4 D
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Accept the Call from DISA
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
→ Tone Detection—DISA Tone Detection—Silence
→ Tone Detection—DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
→ Tone Detection—DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ CLI Destination
2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
→ DIL—DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ CLI for DIL—CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
PT Programming Manual
[209] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[210] DISA CO-to-CO Line Call Prolong Time
[211] DISA Intercept Time
[475] DISA Silence Detection
[476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection
[477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection
[604] Extension Intercept Destination
[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
[732] DISA Security Mode
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb)
1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
1.9.9 Intercept Routing
1.9.10 Intercept Routing—No Destination
Operating Manual References
1.3.18 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
1.3.57 Walking COS
66
Feature Manual
1.4 D
1.4.7
Display Information
Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving
calls:
Display Item
Display Example
Condition
The extension number and name of the calling or 123: Tom Smith
called extension, or Incoming Call Distribution
(ICD) Group
–
Status of the called extension
123: Busy
–
The number and name of the optional device
Door 02: 1st Door
–
The telephone number dialed
1234567890
–
The received call information
a)
b)
c)
d)
Caller's name
Caller's number
CO line number/name
Original Destination, if the call is forwarded
Duration of the current CO line call
ABC Company
12345678
Line 001: Sales
→102:Mike
Line 001 11:02'28
The first line message can
be either (a), (c), or (e) at
each extension through
system programming.
–
Conditions
•
•
Multilingual Display
Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display Language
Selection).
Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the display's limitations are not displayed. Although in
this case information may not be displayed properly, the received information is not altered.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→ Option 4—Display Language
→ Option 5—Incoming Call Display
→ Option 5—Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→ Option 4—Display Language
→ Option 5—Incoming Call Display
→ Option 5—Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
2.15.1 [9-1] CO Line Settings—CO Name
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual
67
1.4 D
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.4.8
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Description
An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension,
but will arrive at another extension using the Idle Extension Hunting feature (→ 1.9.7 Idle Extension Hunting)
or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature (→ 1.9.9 Intercept Routing). When a destination cannot be
found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone, while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DND for CO Line Calls/Intercom Calls
The DND feature can be set for CO line calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension
user.
DSS button in DND Mode
The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND.
DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in
their COS.
Paging DND
It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. (→
1.13.1 Paging)
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
If a call arrives at an extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to a preprogrammed destination
by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature.
Idle Extension Hunting
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has
DND set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—
Busy/DND destination.
If (1) a CO line call arrives at an extension in DND mode and (2) the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group,
then the original extension in DND mode will ring.
Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / DND Override
→ BSS / DND Override-2
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—DND Override
2.10.2 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
→ Call from CO—DND Status Availability
→ Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
68
Feature Manual
1.4 D
PT Programming Manual
[507] DND Override
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.19 DND (Do Not Disturb)
1.4.9
Door Open
Description
Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in Class of Service (COS)
programming. While engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor
in. (→ 1.4.10 Doorphone Call)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door.
A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed.
Door Open Duration
An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time.
The port of the DPH4 card to which the door opener is connected must be assigned through system
programming as a door opener port (not a relay port). If it is not, it may not be possible to open the door
while on a doorphone call.
Installation Manual References
2.8.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—Doorphone—Open Duration
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Door Open
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Door Unlock
PT Programming Manual
[207] Door Unlock Time
[512] Permission for Door Open Access
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Feature Manual
69
1.4 D
Operating Manual References
1.3.20 Door Open
1.4.10 Doorphone Call
Description
A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement:
An optional doorphone and a DPH card
Call Destination
The destination of doorphone calls can be assigned to each doorphone port for each time mode. The
Time Table is determined by the tenant number assigned to each doorphone port. (→ 1.17.4 Time
Service)
The following destinations cannot be the destination for doorphone calls:
– Floating Extension no. for SVM
– DISA
– Analog Remote Maintenance
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an
outgoing CO line call.
Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone. (→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block)
Ring Duration
If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and
the call is canceled.
Call Duration
The duration of doorphone calls can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be
disconnected.
Door Open
While engaged on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. (→ 1.4.9
Door Open)
A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port.
Doorphones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) cannot make a call simultaneously. If a visitor presses the doorphone
button while the other doorphone is engaged in a call, he will hear no tone.
Doorphones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) cannot receive a call simultaneously. If an extension user calls a
doorphone while the other doorphone is engaged in a call, he will hear a busy tone.
Installation Manual References
2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TAW84861)
2.8.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
70
Feature Manual
1.4 D
→ Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
→ Doorphone—Call Duration
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Doorphone Call
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone
PT Programming Manual
[720] Doorphone Call Destination
[729] Doorphone Number Reference
Operating Manual References
1.3.21 Doorphone Call
Feature Manual
71
1.5 E
1.5
E
1.5.1
EFA (External Feature Access)
Description
Normally, an extension user can only access features within the PBX. However, when performing External
Feature Access (EFA) the extension user performs features outside of the PBX, such as using the transfer
services of the telephone company or host PBX. When EFA is performed, the PBX sends a flash/recall
signal to the telephone company or the host PBX (→ 1.8.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a Host PBX)).
This feature is only available on CO line calls.
This feature is performed by pressing the EFA button or the FLASH/RECALL button that is set to EFA mode
(→ 1.6.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate).
Conditions
•
•
•
Flash/Recall Time
The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each CO line port.
EFA Button
A flexible button can be customized as the EFA button.
It is possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number while the current call is placed on
Consultation Hold (e.g., is going to be transferred to an extension of the host PBX).
(→ 1.3.15 Consultation Hold)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Flash Time
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Feature Access
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO Conversation
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO Conversation
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA
PT Programming Manual
[417] LCOT Flash/Recall Time
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.22 EFA (External Feature Access)
72
Feature Manual
1.5 E
1.5.2
Emergency Call
Description
An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers after seizing a CO line regardless of the
restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
•
•
A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored.
Emergency numbers may be called, regardless of Toll Restriction (TRS) level (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll
Restriction)), even when:
– in Account Code—Forced mode (→ 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)
– in Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
PT Programming Manual
[304] Emergency Number
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.5.3
Executive Busy Override
Description
Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Executive Busy Override Deny
It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.
Conditions
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users who can use Executive Busy
Override and set Executive Busy Override Deny.
This feature will not function when the busy extension:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security (→ 1.4.1 Data Line Security).
f)
Has a call on consultation hold (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)).
Is being monitored by another extension (→ 1.3.4 Call Monitor).
Is on a conference call (→ 1.3.13 Conference, → 1.13.10 Privacy Release).
Is on a doorphone call (→ 1.4.10 Doorphone Call).
Is using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
Feature Manual
73
1.5 E
•
This feature is not available for a CO-to-CO line call via Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Executive Busy Override
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→ CO & SMDR—Executive Busy Override
→ Extension Feature—Executive Busy Override Deny
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny
PT Programming Manual
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.23 Executive Busy Override
1.5.4
Extension Dial Lock
Description
An extension user can change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level of the telephone (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll
Restriction)) so that other users cannot make inappropriate CO line calls. An extension personal
identification number (PIN) is used to unlock the telephone (→ 1.5.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number)).
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
74
This feature also restricts changing the Call Forward (FWD) destination. (→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding))
Remote Extension Dial Lock
Overrides Extension Dial Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Dial
Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. If
a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user, the extension
will be unlocked.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
TRS Level
COS programming determines the TRS level for Extension Dial Lock.
Other features can also temporarily change an extension's TRS level, similar to Extension Dial Lock. If
an extension is locked, the TRS level determined by the following features takes priority. The numbers
Feature Manual
1.5 E
below (1 through 3) indicate the priority of each feature, with 1 having the highest priority, and 3 having
the lowest.
1) Dial Tone Transfer (→ 1.4.4 Dial Tone Transfer)
2) TRS Override by System Speed Dialing (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction))
3) Verification Code Entry/Walking COS (→ 1.19.1 Verification Code Entry, → 1.20.1 Walking COS)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
→ Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
→ Remote Extension Dial Lock On
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level on Extension Lock
PT Programming Manual
[510] TRS Level for Extension Dial Lock
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.24 Extension Dial Lock
3.2.2 Manager Programming
1.5.5
Extension Feature Clear
Description
Extension users can clear the following features set on their own telephone all at once:
Features
After Setting
Absent Message
Off
BGM
Off
FWD*/DND*
Off
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Call Waiting*
Enable (Call Waiting tone)
Data Line Security
Off
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Message Waiting
All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.
Paging Deny
Allow
Feature Manual
75
1.5 E
Features
After Setting
Hot Line*
Off
Timed Reminder
Cleared
*
These features can be programmed to not be canceled by Extension Feature Clear.
This feature is also known as Station Program Clear.
Conditions
•
•
Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock) and the extension personal identification number
(PIN) (→ 1.5.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)) will not be cleared by this feature.
If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, Call Waiting will be enabled if "Extension Clear: Call
Waiting" is set to "Clear" through system programming. In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when
going off-hook. (→ 1.4.3 Dial Tone)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension Feature Clear
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
→ Extension Clear—Call Waiting
→ Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
→ Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
1.3.25 Extension Feature Clear
1.5.6
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Description
Each extension user can be assigned a personal identification number (PIN) through system programming
or personal programming (Extension PIN [Personal Identification Number]). This PIN is used to set features
or access the extension remotely.
The following features require a valid PIN:
a) Live Call Screening (LCS)* (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
b) Incoming Call Log Display Lock (→ 1.16.3 Speed Dialing, Personal), Personal Speed Dialing
Display Lock (→ 1.3.3 Call Log, Incoming)
c) Walking Extension (→ 1.20.2 Walking Extension)
d) Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock)
e) Walking COS (→ 1.20.1 Walking COS)
76
Feature Manual
1.5 E
f)
Walking COS through DISA (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
*: If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN, the PIN is required when activating this feature.
Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such
calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent
use, we strongly recommend:
a) Keeping PINs secret.
b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c) Changing PINs regularly.
•
•
•
Extension PIN Lock
If the extension PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If an incorrect PIN
is entered a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN will be locked. Only an extension assigned as a
manager can unlock a PIN, after which it will be reset. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
This feature is also known as Station Password Lock.
Remote Extension PIN Clear
If an extension user forgets his or her PIN, a manager can clear (reset) the PIN, and the extension user
can assign a new PIN.
Extension PIN Display
It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming.
By default, it is shown as dots.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension PIN Set / Cancel
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
PT Programming Manual
[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.2.2 Manager Programming
Feature Manual
77
1.5 E
1.5.7
Extension Port Configuration
Description
There are three types of extension ports, used to connect analog proprietary telephones (APTs), single line
telephones (SLTs), Cell Stations (CSs), DSS Consoles, and Voice Processing Systems (VPS) to the PBX.
The devices which can be connected to each type of port are listed below.
a) APT Port: APT, DSS Console, and Panasonic VPS which supports DPT (Digital) Integration
b) SLT Port: SLT and Panasonic VPS which supports DTMF Integration
c) Hybrid Port: APT, SLT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS, and PT-interface CS
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Automatic Detection on Hybrid Port
An APT, SLT or PT-interface CS connected to a hybrid port can be detected automatically without any
programming.
APT and SLT in Parallel Mode
An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a hybrid port and used in parallel mode.
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
A PS can be used in Wireless XDP Parallel mode with a wired telephone.
(→ 1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system
programming.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Pair Extension
PT Programming Manual
[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone
1.5.8
External Relay
Description
By turning external device relays on and off, the PBX can control external devices such as alarms.
When an extension user enters the External Relay Control feature number, the specified relay turns on for
a preprogrammed length of time. When this timer expires, the relay turns off automatically. This gives the
PBX simple control over other equipment, allowing an extension user to, for example, activate an alarm from
his extension.
If the relay cannot be accessed (for example, because use is not permitted by COS, or the port is not in
service), a reorder tone will be heard at the extension.
Conditions
•
78
Hardware Requirement:
Feature Manual
1.5 E
•
•
•
•
•
An external relay device and DPH card
The port of the DPH4 card to which the relay is connected must be assigned through system
programming as a relay port (not a door opener port).
Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the
manufacturer of a device before installing it.
Each external relay port has a COS assigned. This and the COS of an extension determine the
extension users who can use External Relay Control.
The length of time that a relay is turned on can be specified separately for each relay through system
programming.
If the same or another extension tries to access an external relay that has already been switched on,
the timer for that relay is reset.
Installation Manual References
2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TAW84861)
2.8.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property—For Output (EIO)—Device Type
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Relay Access
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—External Relay Access
2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.27 External Relay
1.5.9
External Sensor
Description
External sensing devices, such as security alarms or smoke detectors, can be connected to the PBX. When
the PBX receives input from a sensor, a call is made to the preset destination, alerting the extension user.
The available destinations of a sensor call are as follows:
[Available Destinations]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
Feature Manual
79
1.5 E
Destination
Availability
PS
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
When the call is answered, if distinctive dial tones are enabled, dial tone 3 is heard, which continues until
the user goes on-hook. If the sensor call is not answered within a specified time, the call will be canceled.
It is possible to set a different ring tone pattern for calls received from each external sensor, to distinguish
between them.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement:
An external sensor and DPH card
Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the
manufacturer of a device before installing it.
After a sensor has been activated, the PBX will ignore any further alerts from the same sensor for the
duration specified by a timer. This timer can be set separately for each sensor.
As long as the previous sensor call is still being performed, any further alerts from the same sensor are
ignored.
The assigned sensor name and/or number are shown on the display of PTs and PSs when a sensor
call is received.
If the destination of a sensor call has set FWD, the sensor call will be redirected to the FWD destination.
However, if the FWD destination is not supported as the destination of a sensor call (e.g., an outside
party), the call will be received at the original destination. (→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
The following features cannot be used when a sensor call is received:
– Alternate Receiving—Voice (→ 1.9.11 Intercom Call)
– Hands-free Answerback (→ 1.8.1 Hands-free Answerback)
– Consultation Hold/Call Hold (→ 1.3.2 Call Hold)
– Call Transfer (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer)
– Executive Busy Override (→ 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override)
Sensor call information is output on SMDR.
Installation Manual References
2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TAW84861)
80
Feature Manual
1.5 E
2.8.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property
→ For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Decision Time
→ For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—External Sensor—Ring Duration
2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual
81
1.6 F
1.6
F
1.6.1
Fixed Buttons
Description
Proprietary telephones (PTs) and DSS Consoles feature a wide variety of feature buttons and Line Access
buttons, explained below.
Note that certain models do not feature certain buttons.
For a description of the buttons found on portable stations (PSs), please refer to the Operating Instructions
for each PS.
Button
Usage
Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset, and
also adjust the display contrast. The Navigator Key can also be used to
select data from the Call Directory on the display.
Navigator Key,
Volume Key
82
PROGRAM
Used to enter and exit programming mode.
FLASH/RECALL
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without
hanging up (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode), or used to send a
flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access
external features (External Feature Access mode). This button can also
be used as a CANCEL button while on-hook.
HOLD
Used to place a call on hold.
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone)
Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch between handset
and hands-free operation.
MONITOR
Used for hands-free dialing. Also used to monitor the other party's voice
in hands-free mode.
MESSAGE
Used to leave a Message Waiting indication or call back the party who
left the Message Waiting indication.
REDIAL
Used to redial the last number dialed.
TRANSFER
Used to transfer a call to another party.
Flexible CO
Used to access a CO line or trunk group when making or receiving a call
according to the button's preprogrammed CO Line Access method
(Default: S-CO). Can also be customized as a different feature button.
INTERCOM
Used to make or receive intercom calls.
AUTO ANS (Auto Answer)
/MUTE
Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode, or used to mute
the built-in microphone or handset during a conversation.
Feature Manual
1.6 F
Button
Usage
VOICE CALL
Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a hands-free
conversation is not possible).
AUTO DIAL/STORE
Used for System/Personal Speed Dialing and storing program changes.
CONF (Conference)
Used to establish a multiparty conversation.
FWD/DND
Used to set Call Forwarding (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND)
PAUSE
Used to insert a dialing pause in a stored number. Also used as the
Program button on analog proprietary telephones (APTs) which do not
have the PROGRAM button.
PF (Programmable Feature)
Used to access a preprogrammed feature with a one-touch operation.
(no default)
[DSS Console]
Button
Usage
ANSWER
Used to answer an incoming call, or place the current call on hold and
answer another call with a one-touch operation.
RELEASE
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to
complete a Call Transfer.
Flexible CO
Used to access a CO line or trunk group when making or receiving a call
according to the button's preprogrammed CO Line Access method. Can
also be customized as a different feature button.
Flexible DSS (Direct Station
Selection)
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is
programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be
customized as other different feature buttons.
PF (Programmable Feature)
Used to access a preprogrammed feature with a one-touch operation.
(no default)
Conditions
•
1.6.2
Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.
Flash/Recall/Terminate
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate
mode) or Terminate button (Terminate mode) to disconnect the current call and originate another call without
hanging up.
Flash/Recall Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last.
For example, if a CO line call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same
CO line.
Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears a dial tone via the preferred CO line.
(→ 1.10.3 Line Preference—Outgoing)
Feature Manual
83
1.6 F
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming:
– Flash/Recall mode
– Terminate mode
– EFA mode. (→ 1.5.1 EFA (External Feature Access))
Terminate Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the Terminate button.
Disconnect Time (Only for Flash/Recall Mode)
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same CO line is programmable for each CO
line port.
This feature generates a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record (→ 1.16.1 SMDR
(Station Message Detail Recording)), restarts the call timer, inserts a pause, and checks the Toll
Restriction (TRS) level (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)) again.
The Terminate feature will be performed when pressing the FLASH/RECALL button regardless of the
mode that the FLASH/RECALL button has been set to, in the following situations:
– When a call is made using ARS. (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
– When a CO line call is made with the INTERCOM button.
– When a CO line call is made with an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group button.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Disconnect Time
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO Conversation
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO Conversation
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
PT Programming Manual
[418] LCOT Disconnect Time
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.6.3
Flexible Buttons
Description
Flexible buttons are customized through either system or personal programming. The following types of
flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones (PTs), DSS Consoles, and/or portable stations (PSs):
a) Flexible CO buttons
b) Flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons
c) Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
84
Feature Manual
1.6 F
[Button Usage]
Button
Usage
Single-CO (S-CO)
Used to access a specified CO line for making or receiving calls. (→
1.3.11 CO Line Access)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Used to access an idle CO line in a specified trunk group for making
calls. Incoming calls from CO lines in the assigned trunk group arrive at
this button. (→ 1.3.11 CO Line Access)
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Used to access an idle CO line for making calls. Incoming calls from any
CO line arrive at this button. (→ 1.3.11 CO Line Access)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. (→ 1.9.11
Intercom Call)
One-touch Dialing
Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a onetouch operation. (→ 1.12.2 One-touch Dialing)
Incoming Call Distribution
(ICD) Group
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution (ICD) group for
making or receiving calls. (→ 1.9.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
Message
Used to leave a Message Waiting indication or call back the party who
left the Message Waiting indication. (→ 1.11.3 Message Waiting)
FWD/DND (External/Internal/
Both)*
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension. The feature is
applied to CO line calls, intercom calls, or both. (→ 1.6.7 FWD/DND
Button, Group FWD Button)
Group FWD (External/Internal/ Used to set the FWD feature for a specified ICD group. The feature is
Both)
applied to CO line calls, intercom calls, or both. (→ 1.6.7 FWD/DND
Button, Group FWD Button)
Account Code Entry (Account) Used to enter an account code. (→ 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)
Conference
Used to establish a multiparty conversation. (→ 1.3.13 Conference)
Terminate
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without
hanging up. (→ 1.6.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate)
External Feature Access (EFA) Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host
PBX to access external features. (→ 1.5.1 EFA (External Feature
Access))
Call Park
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone. (→ 1.3.5
Call Park)
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically. (→ 1.3.5
Call Park)
Call Log
Used to show a log of received calls. (→ 1.3.3 Call Log, Incoming)
Log-in/Log-out*
Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status. (→ 1.9.3 ICD Group
Features—Log-in/Log-out)
Hurry-up
Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an ICD group to
the overflow destination. (→ 1.9.5 ICD Group Features—Queuing)
Wrap-up*
Used to switch between Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes. (→
1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
System Alarm
Used to display a PBX error. (→ 1.10.4 Local Alarm Information)
Feature Manual
85
1.6 F
Button
Usage
Time Service*
Used to change or display the current time mode (day/lunch/break/
night). (→ 1.17.4 Time Service)
Answer
Used to answer an incoming call. (→ 1.8.3 Headset Operation)
Release
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to
complete a Call Transfer. (→ 1.8.3 Headset Operation)
Toll Restriction
Used to change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level of other extension users
temporarily. (→ 1.4.4 Dial Tone Transfer)
Headset
Used to turn headset mode on/off while idle.
Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes during a
conversation. (→ 1.8.3 Headset Operation)
Time Service Switching Mode Used to switch between Automatic Switching and Manual Switching
(Automatic/Manual)*
mode. (→ 1.17.4 Time Service)
Two-way Record
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox. (→ 1.19.4 Voice
Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension.
(→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension
with a one-touch operation. (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration)
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a
message and, if desired, intercept the call. (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT
(Digital) Integration)
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. (→ 1.19.4
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration, → 1.19.5 Voice Mail DTMF
Integration)
*: One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature
settings. The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy
2.10.6 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
86
Feature Manual
1.6 F
1.6.4
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Description
To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or
feature numbers) are required.
There are three types of numbering plans:
1) Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
2) Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
3) Fixed Numbering (available while dialing or talking)
1. Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be
customized for easy use. The numbers must not conflict. It is also possible to use default (Pattern 1 or
Pattern 2) shown in the following table:
a) Extension Numbers: Extension numbers consist of leading numbers and additional numbers.
Extension numbers (consisting of “0” through “9”) can be assigned as follows:
•
Numbering schemes: 1-64
•
Leading number: up to three digits
•
Additional number: up to two digits (default: two digits)
[Example]
If the number "3" is programmed as a leading number for the 1st extension numbering scheme,
and "XX" is programmed as the additional digits, extension numbers 300 through 399 are available.
b) Feature Numbers: Up to four digits, consisting of 0-9, " ", and "#"
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Pattern 2
(without )
Extension Numbering Scheme 1—Leading Number
1/2
10
Extension Numbering Scheme 2—Leading Number
2/3
11
Extension Numbering Scheme 3—Leading Number
3/4
12
Extension Numbering Scheme 4—Leading Number
4/1
13
Extension Numbering Scheme 5—Leading Number
None
14
Extension Numbering Scheme 6—Leading Number
None
15
Extension Numbering Scheme 7—Leading Number
None
16
Extension Numbering Scheme 8—Leading Number
None
17
Extension Numbering Scheme 9—Leading Number
None
18
Extension Numbering Scheme 10—Leading Number
None
None
Extension Numbering Scheme 11—Leading Number
None
20
Feature Manual
87
1.6 F
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Pattern 2
(without )
Extension Numbering Scheme 12—Leading Number
None
21
Extension Numbering Scheme 13—Leading Number
None
22
Extension Numbering Scheme 14—Leading Number
None
23
Extension Numbering Scheme 15—Leading Number
None
24
Extension Numbering Scheme 16—Leading Number
None
25
Extension Numbering Scheme 17—Leading Number
None
26
Extension Numbering Scheme 18—Leading Number
None
27
Extension Numbering Scheme 19—Leading Number
None
28
Extension Numbering Scheme 20—Leading Number
None
None
Extension Numbering Scheme 21—Leading Number
5/5
19
Extension Numbering Scheme 22—Leading Number
6/6
29
Extension Numbering Scheme 23–64—Leading Number
None
None
Operator Call
9/0
0
0 /1/ 9
9
Trunk Group Access
8
8
Redial
#
#
Personal Speed Dialing—Programming
30
30
Doorphone Call
31
31
Group Paging
33
33
External BGM on/off
35
35
Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record/clear
36
36
S-CO Line Access
37
37
SVM—Personal Greeting Message playback/record/clear
38
None
Group Call Pickup
40
40
Directed Call Pickup
41
41
TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager
42
42
Group Paging answer
43
43
Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel
46
46
User Remote Operation/Walking COS/Verification Code Entry
47
47
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel
48
48
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
Speed Dialing—System/Personal
88
Feature Manual
1.6 F
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Pattern 2
(without )
Account Code Entry
49
49
Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve
50
50
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Holding Extension
Number
51
51
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve
52
52
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Held CO line Number
53
53
Door Open
55
55
External Relay
56
56
External Feature Access
60
60
Message Waiting set/cancel/callback
70
70
FWD/DND set/cancel—Both
710
710
FWD/DND set/cancel—External
711
711
FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal
712
712
FWD/DND No Answer Timer set
713
713
Group FWD set/cancel—Both
714
714
Group FWD set/cancel—External
715
715
Group FWD set/cancel—Internal
716
716
Call Pickup Deny set/cancel
720
720
Paging Deny set/cancel
721
721
Walking Extension
727
727
Data Line Security set/cancel
730
730
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call off/BSS
731
731
Automatic Call Waiting set/cancel
732
732
Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel
733
733
Not Ready Mode on/off
735
735
Log-in/Log-out
736
736
Hot Line program/set/cancel
740
740
Absent Message set/cancel
750
750
BGM set/cancel
751
751
Remote Wake-up Call
76
76
Feature Manual
89
1.6 F
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Pattern 2
(without )
Timed Reminder set/cancel
760
760
Printing Message
761
761
Extension Dial Lock set/cancel
77
77
Time Service Switch
780
780
Remote Extension Dial Lock off
782
782
Remote Extension Dial Lock on
783
783
Extension Feature Clear
790
790
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) set/cancel
799
799
Quick Dialing 1-80
None
None
2. Flexible Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
Feature numbers which are available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customized
for easy use. The numbers should be one digit (0-9, " ", or "#") and must not conflict. For a list of the
default settings, refer to the following table:
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)]
Feature
Default
Call Waiting/DND Override
1 or 2*
Executive Busy Override
3
Message Waiting set
4
Call Monitor
5
Automatic Callback Busy
6
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
*:
To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default.
3. Fixed Numbering (available while dialing or talking)
Features which are available while dialing or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialing or talking)]
Feature
Fixed Numbering
Pulse to Tone Conversion
90
Conference
3
Door Open
5
Feature Manual
1.6 F
Conditions
•
•
•
•
The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32
and 321, etc.
Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Certain flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set
Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same
feature number should be followed by "0".
Rotary single line telephone (SLT) users cannot dial feature numbers which include " " or "#".
Portable station (PS) users cannot use the following features:
– Personal Speed Dialing
– OGM playback/record
– S-CO Line Access
– Walking Extension
– BGM set/cancel
– Timed Reminder
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
→ Extension
→ Features
2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
PT Programming Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering
Feature Manual References
1.13.11 PS Connection
1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
4.2.1 Feature Number Table
Feature Manual
91
1.6 F
1.6.5
Floating Extension
Description
Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them as easily accessible as extensions.
These numbers are referred to as "floating extension numbers" and can be assigned as a destination of
incoming calls, intercepted calls, etc.
This feature is also known as Floating Station.
Resource
Device
External Pager
Description
Default
Used as the destination for the Trunk Answer From
Any Station (TAFAS) feature. (→ 1.17.1 TAFAS
(Trunk Answer From Any Station))
600
Outgoing Message Used to play messages for callers via the Direct
(OGM)
Inward System Access (DISA) feature. (→ 1.4.6
DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
Group
Simplified Voice
Message (SVM)
Used to access message boxes associated with
extensions. (→ 1.16.5 SVM (Simplified Voice
Message))
Analog Remote
Maintenance
Used to access PC programming mode through a
modem on a PC.
Incoming Call
Distribution (ICD)
Group
Used to call an ICD group. (→ 1.9.1 ICD GROUP
FEATURES)
PS Ring Group
Used to call a PS ring group. (→ 1.13.14 PS Ring
Group)
VM (DPT) Group
Used to call a VM (DPT) group.
VM (DTMF) Group
Used to call a VM (DTMF) group.
5 + two-digit
OGM number
SVM card 1:
591
SVM card 2:
592
599
6 + two-digit
group number
—
500 (VM [DPT]
Group 1)
—
Conditions
•
Certain resources which are assigned a floating extension number can also be assigned a name.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
→ Floating Extension Number
→ Group Name
2.9.16 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Floating Extension No.
2.9.19 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Floating Ext. No.
2.9.21 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Floating Extension Number
92
Feature Manual
1.6 F
2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager—Page Number 1—Floating Extension Number
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating Extension Number
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—Remote—Remote—Analog Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
PT Programming Manual
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number
[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
[811] Modem Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
1.13.5 PC Programming
1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.6.6
FWD (Call Forwarding)
Description
Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are
several different types of forwarding, and the circumstances under which the calls are forwarded for each
type differ as follows:
Type
Circumstance
All Calls
Any time
Follow Me:
When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the
desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
Busy
When the extension user's line is busy.
No Answer
When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed
time.
Busy/No Answer
When the extension user's line is busy or the user does not answer
within a preprogrammed time.
Depending on the type of incoming intercom or CO line calls, it is possible to set a different destination for
each.
Feature Manual
93
1.6 F
Extension
Incoming
Intercom Calls
Forwards to
Another Extension
Forwards to
Outside Party
Incoming CO
Line Calls
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
ICD Group
Incoming
Intercom Calls
Forwards to
Another Extension
Incoming CO
Line Calls
Forwards to
Outside Party
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls
[Available Destinations]
Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
Availability
Condition for Original Extension/
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Only available when FWD to
extension is allowed through COS
programming.*
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
–
Floating Extension no. for SVM
–
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
–
External Pager (TAFAS)
–
DISA
Only available for incoming CO line
calls. Incoming intercom and
doorphone calls cannot be forwarded
to a DISA floating extension number.
Analog Remote Maintenance
–
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Only available when FWD to CO line
is allowed through COS
programming.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
94
Feature Manual
1.6 F
*: If an extension user is not permitted by COS to call a certain extension (→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block),
the FWD feature will not function if that extension is set as the forwarding destination.
Conditions
[General]
•
•
•
•
•
FWD for CO Line Calls/Intercom Calls
The extension user can set the FWD feature for CO line calls, for intercom calls, or for both.
FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD)
COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature.
FWD to CO Line
COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls
externally.
The original extension's Toll Restriction and ARS still apply to the forwarded call.
CO Line Call Duration
The duration of a CO line call can be restricted by a system timer. CO line call duration is assigned
separately for calls between an extension user and an outside party, and calls between two outside
parties.
If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. (→ 1.3.12 CO Line Call Limitation)
Multiple FWD
Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD:
– FWD—Busy or Busy/No Answer (when the destination extension is busy), or All Calls
– Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow
– Intercept Routing—Busy/DND (when the destination extension is busy or in DND mode)
– Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow
Incoming
call
1
A
2
B
3
C
4
D
5
E
F
Original
destination
In the above illustration, forwarding stops at extension E. However, forwarding can go farther in the
following cases:
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the
FWD—No Answer or Busy/No Answer feature.
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the
Intercept Routing—No Answer feature.
– If a call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group, and then the call is redirected to the
overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table. (→ 1.9.5 ICD Group Features—Queuing)
In the above cases, the forwarding counter resets to zero, and the call can be forwarded up to four times
again from the destination extension described above.
Feature Manual
95
1.6 F
Incoming
call
1
A
2
B
3
C
Original
destination
•
1
D
2
E
F
FWD No Answer
Boss & Secretary feature
It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward
setting.
FWD—All Calls
Incoming
call
Call or
transfer a call
Boss
(Original)
•
•
Secretary
(FWD destination)
Message Waiting
While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The Message button light
turns on at the originally called extension. (→ 1.11.3 Message Waiting)
Idle Extension Hunting
Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group.
[All Calls and Busy]
•
If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is canceled and the original
destination will ring for the following type of call:
– Doorphone call
– CO line calls
[No Answer and Busy/No Answer]
•
No Answer Time
The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension.
[Follow Me]
•
This feature is only available when the original extension has set "Remote Operation by Other
Extension" to "Allow" through COS programming.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—FWD No Answer Timer Set
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→ TRS—Call Forward to CO
→ Extension Feature—Group Forward Set
→ Extension Feature—Remote Operation by Other Extension
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
→ CO-CO Duration Time
→ Extension-CO Duration Time
96
Feature Manual
1.6 F
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
2.10.2 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.9 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND
PT Programming Manual
[472] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration
[473] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[605] Call Forwarding—No Answer Time
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.9.4 ICD Group Features—Overflow
1.9.7 Idle Extension Hunting
1.9.9 Intercept Routing
Operating Manual References
1.3.29 FWD (Call Forwarding)
1.6.7
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Description
The FWD/DND fixed button, or a customized flexible button, can display the FWD/DND setting status of the
extension. Using this button, the FWD status and DND status of the extension can be temporarily set or
canceled without clearing FWD destination settings.
FWD/DND Button Types
Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customized on an extension.
Type
Description
FWD/DND for Extension FWD/DND—Internal
Works for incoming intercom calls
FWD/DND—External
Works for incoming CO line calls
FWD/DND—Both
Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Status (default)
Red on
DND on
Slow red flashing
FWD on
Off
FWD/DND off
The functions assigned to the "on" and "flashing" patterns can be changed through system programming.
Feature Manual
97
1.6 F
Group FWD Button Types
The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customized on a flexible button. Multiple
types of Group FWD buttons can be customized on an extension.
Type
FWD for Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Description
Group FWD—Internal
Works for incoming intercom calls
Group FWD—External
Works for incoming CO line calls
Group FWD—Both
Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status]
The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Status (default)
Red on
FWD on
Off
FWD off
FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button
Pressing the fixed FWD/DND button in idle status allows the extension user to set the following items for
FWD/DND:
•
FWD/DND for CO line calls
The FWD/DND status for CO line calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without
clearing the FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current CO line call
FWD/DND status. The forwarding type and destination for CO line calls can also be set.
•
FWD/DND for intercom calls
The FWD/DND status for intercom calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without
clearing the FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current intercom call
FWD/DND status. The forwarding type and destination for intercom calls can also be set.
•
FWD—No Answer timer
The length of time until unanswered calls are forwarded can be modified. This setting is applied to
both intercom and CO line call forwarding.
These settings are only available when FWD/DND buttons are set through system programming to FWD/
DND Setting mode.
Conditions
•
When FWD/DND buttons are set to FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, pressing the FWD/DND button
cycles the FWD/DND setting.
In this mode, when intercom calls are set to be handled differently from CO line calls (forwarding type,
forward destination, DND on/off):
a) in idle mode, the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) and the Group FWD—Both button will indicate the setting for either CO line calls or
intercom calls, but not both.
b) the FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for CO line calls only.
c) pressing the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group
FWD—Both button will be ignored.
98
Feature Manual
1.6 F
•
When both the FWD and DND features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the
settings as follows:
FWD
•
DND
Off
A FWD/DND button customized on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the
mode cannot be changed.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1
→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
→ PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.1 Fixed Buttons
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Feature Manual
99
1.6 F
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
100
Feature Manual
1.7 G
1.7
G
1.7.1
GROUP FEATURES
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1. Trunk Group
CO lines can be grouped into trunk groups based on carrier, CO line type, etc. Several settings can be
assigned on a trunk group basis. All CO lines belonging to a trunk group follow the programming for
that trunk group.
→ 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
→ [402] LCOT Trunk Group Number
Each CO line can belong to only one trunk group. CO lines are assigned to a trunk group based on their
port numbers.
2. Extension User Group
Extensions can be grouped into extension user groups. Extension user groups then compose the
following groups:
a) Tenant (→ 1.17.2 Tenant Service)
b) Call Pickup Group (See below.)
c) Paging Group (See below.)
Every extension must belong to one extension user group and cannot belong to more than one
extension user group.
→ 2.9.3 [3-2] Extension Group
→ [603] Extension User Group
Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephone (PT)/single line telephone (SLT)/portable station (PS)
[Example]
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
2.1 Call Pickup Group
Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group
to which they belong. One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (→ 1.3.6
Call Pickup)
→ 2.9.4 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
→ 2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
→ [650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
Feature Manual
101
1.7 G
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1
Call Pickup Group 2
Call Pickup Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
2.2 Paging Group
Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group or answer a page to
their own groups. One extension user group or external pager (loudspeaker) can belong to several
paging groups.
(→ 1.13.1 Paging)
→ 2.9.6 [3-4] Paging Group
→ 2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
→ 2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
→ [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[Example]
Paging Group 1
Paging Group 2
Paging Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Paging Group 4
Pager
3. Idle Extension Hunting Group
If a called extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the
incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group. Members are programmed
through system programming. When calls are received, idle extensions are automatically searched for
according to a preprogrammed hunting type: Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting. (→ 1.9.7 Idle
Extension Hunting)
→ 2.9.13 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
→ 2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
→ [680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
→ [681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
4. Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group)
An ICD group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each ICD
group has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number) and name. One extension
can belong to multiple ICD groups.
→ 2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ 2.9.12 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member
→ [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/PS ring group
(→ 1.9.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
102
Feature Manual
1.7 G
[Example]
ICD Group 1
Floating Extn. No. 601,
Name: Sales 1
ICD Group 2
Floating Extn. No. 602,
Name: Sales 2
Extn. 103 Extn. 104
Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102
5. VM Group
There are two types of VM groups, explained below.
Type
Description
VM (DPT) Group
A group of APT or hybrid ports which use Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration features.
One APT or hybrid port can belong to only one group.
VM (DTMF) Group
A group of SLT ports which use Voice Mail DTMF Integration features.
One SLT port can belong to only one group.
(→ 1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)
→ 2.9.15 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
→ 2.9.16 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
→ 2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
→ 2.9.19 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
→ 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
→ [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[Example]
PBX
Hybrid
Port
VM (DPT) Group
Floating extn. no. 500
VM (DTMF) Group
Floating extn. no. 200
Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104
Extn.201 Extn.202 Extn.203 Extn.204
Hybrid
Port
Hybrid
Port
Hybrid
Port
Hybrid
Port
VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration)
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
VPS
(DTMF Integration)
6. PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each
group has a floating extension number and name assigned through system programming. One PS can
belong to multiple PS ring groups.
(→ 1.13.14 PS Ring Group)
→ 2.9.21 [3-9] PS Ring Group
→ 2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Feature Manual
103
1.7 G
PS Ring Group 1
Floating Extension No. 301
Name: Sales 1
PS 1
(Extn. 601)
PS 2
(Extn. 602)
PS Ring Group 2
Floating Extension No. 302
Name: Sales 2
PS 3
(Extn. 603)
PS 4
(Extn. 701)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9 [3] Group
PT Programming Manual
[402] LCOT Trunk Group Number
[603] Extension User Group
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
104
Feature Manual
PS 5
(Extn. 702)
1.8 H
1.8
H
1.8.1
Hands-free Answerback
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user with a speakerphone or optional headset can talk to a caller without lifting
the handset. If the user receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is
established in the following method:
Type
Answering Method
Intercom Call
Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and
the caller hears a confirmation tone.
CO Line Call
Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension hears
a beep tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls and CO line calls, including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group (ICD) in
UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method. (→ 1.9.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution)
Hands-free Answerback for CO Line Calls
System programming is required to use this feature.
Hands-free Answerback for Calls From an Extension That Placed a CO Line Call on Consultation
Hold
Calls from an extension that placed a CO line call on Consultation Hold can be treated by this feature
as either intercom calls or CO line calls, depending on system programming. If treated as intercom
calls, the call will be established immediately.
When transferring a call from an analog CO line, users are strongly recommended to perform a
screened transfer, so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using
Hands-free Answerback when the extension user is absent.
Secret Monitor
The beep tone heard by the called party before answering can be eliminated through system
programming.
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override
Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the
Alternate Calling mode from the caller.
Hands-free Answerback with Headset
The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
→ Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
→ Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→ Option 4—Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
Feature Manual
105
1.8 H
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
→ Automatic Answer for CO Call
→ Forced Automatic Answer
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.9.11 Intercom Call
Operating Manual References
1.3.30 Hands-free Answerback
1.8.2
Hands-free Operation
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific
buttons, such as REDIAL, automatically activate hands-free mode.
Conditions
•
PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Answer Mode
PT Programming Manual
None
1.8.3
Headset Operation
Description
This PBX supports headset compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party
hands-free and without lifting the handset by using an optional headset.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
Conditions
•
106
Pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker.
Feature Manual
1.8 H
•
Answer/Release Button
A flexible button can be customized as an Answer button or a Release button. Such buttons are useful
for headset operation. It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing the Answer button. While
hearing a call waiting tone during a conversation, pressing the Answer button enables one to answer
the second call by placing the current call on hold. Pressing the Release button enables one to
disconnect the line during or after conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.32 Headset Operation
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.8.4
HOSPITALITY FEATURES
Description
This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel-type environment.
Feature
Description
Details in
Remote Wake-up Call
An extension designated as the hotel operator can set a • 1.17.3 Timed
timed reminder for a room remotely.
Reminder
SMDR for External Hotel
Application
Timed reminder times can be output to SMDR for use in • 1.16.1 SMDR
a PC-based hotel application.
(Station Message
Detail Recording)
1.8.5
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing PBX (host PBX) by connecting the extension ports of the host
PBX to the CO line ports of this PBX (behind PBX). A Host PBX Access code is required for the behind PBX
to access the telephone company (e.g., to make outside calls) through the host PBX. The CO line access
number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of the behind PBX.
A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialed Host PBX Access code
Feature Manual
107
1.8 H
and the subsequent digits (1.13.4 Pause Insertion).
[Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX
Access Code: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Idle Line
Access No.: 9
Extn. 101
Extn. 102
Dials "0-01-23-4567".
TRG1
Host PBX
Access Code
PBX
Telephone
No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".
Idle Line
Access No.
Telephone No.
Host PBX
Access Code
Dials "9-101".
Idle Line
Access No.
Extn. No.
of the Host PBX
Note
In this example, "0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of this
PBX.
Conditions
•
•
•
108
TRS
TRS checks only the dialed telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing
the telephone company through the host PBX. (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction))
ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits
when ARS mode is enabled. (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
SMDR
The dialed number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on Station Message Detailed
Recording (SMDR) only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.
Feature Manual
1.8 H
•
•
When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are
not recorded on SMDR.
A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a CO line port
is connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long
distance code (e.g., “0”) is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not
require a “0” to be dialed first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get
recorded on SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognizes the telephone company as the host PBX.
Therefore, only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Options—ARS Dial
PT Programming Manual
[471] Host PBX Access Code
Feature Manual References
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.8.6
Hot Line
Description
An extension user can make an outgoing call by simply going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the
telephone number or the extension number.
If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone is generated for a specified time assigned
through system programming and then dialing starts. During this waiting time the user can dial another
party, overriding the Hot Line feature.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialing.
Conditions
•
Compatible Telephone
Proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT), and portable station (PS)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
→ Pickup Dial Set
→ Pickup Dial Number
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
→ Pickup Dial Set
Feature Manual
109
1.8 H
→ Pickup Dial No.
PT Programming Manual
[204] Hot Line Waiting Time
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.33 Hot Line
110
Feature Manual
1.9 I
1.9
I
1.9.1
ICD GROUP FEATURES
Description
An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming.
→ 2.9.12 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member
→ [620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group
has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number).
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in
the group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy,
the incoming calls can wait in a queue.
Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle
incoming calls.
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ Main
→ Overflow Queuing Busy
→ Overflow No Answer
→ Miscellaneous
A
B
Group Floating
No. Extn. No.*1
1
2
3
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
*8:
*9:
601
602
Group
Name*2
Sales
Engineering
C
D
E
F
Max. No. of
Queuing
Overflow Destination*8
Distribution Busy Extensions
Hurry-up Overflow
Tenant
Call
*3
*6
*7
*4
*5
Method (No. of Agents) Capacity
Level
Time
No.*9
Day Lunch Break Night
Ring
UCD
3
Max.
5
11
3
8
60
90
100 103 100 100
200 203 200 200
1
5
→ [622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
→ [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
→ [624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
→ [632] Maximum Number of Agents
→ [628] Queuing Call Capacity
→ [629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
→ [626] Overflow Time
→ [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration/[627] Destination When All Busy
The tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (→ 1.17.4 Time
Service) and the music source (for Music on Hold) for each group.
Feature Manual
111
1.9 I
Calls arrive at ICD group 1.
13
12
F Overflow Feature
11
Redirects to the overflow destination.
10
9
D Queuing Feature
8
Five calls are waiting
in the queue. (Calls
4 through 8)
7
E Manual Queue Redirection *10
6
Calls are distributed
using the assigned
method.
Extn.
101
The longest waiting call in a queue
can be redirected to the overflow
destination by pressing the Hurry-up
button.
5
B Call Distribution
4
Extn.
102
Extn.
103
Extn.
104
A ICD Group 1
Extn.
105
Logged-in
Extn.
105
Logged-out*11
Floating extension no.: 601
Name: Sales
C Agents: 3
*10:
*11:
→ 1.9.5 ICD Group Features—Queuing
→ 1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
1. Group Call Distribution [→ 1.9.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution]
Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods:
Distribution Method
Description
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)
Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is
received.
Priority Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the specified order, always
starting from the same location.
Ring
All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring
simultaneously.
2. Queuing Feature [→ 1.9.5 ICD Group Features—Queuing]
If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a
preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue.
While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can be sent to the
waiting callers.
3. VIP Call [→ 1.9.6 ICD Group Features—VIP Call]
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that incoming calls can be
112
Feature Manual
1.9 I
received in priority order.
4. Overflow Feature [→ 1.9.4 ICD Group Features—Overflow]
A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued (Intercept
Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group).
5. Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature
Feature
Log-in/Log-out
Description & Reference
Member extensions can join the group to handle
calls (Log-in) or leave the group for a break (Logout).
They can leave the group temporarily when they are
away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to
their extensions.
→ 1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Conditions
•
•
•
•
One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups.
ICD Group button
An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming
call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group.
One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call
distribution groups (Multiple ICD Group). If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution
group are occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the ICD Group
button is not assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button.
An extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension
does not belong to through system programming. However, the ICD Group button will not receive calls
to that group.
Group FWD
The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis.
COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups
Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number. Group FWD to an outside party can
be enabled or disabled for each COS. The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the
Internal Call Block feature; when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group, the PBX
checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group (→
1.9.12 Internal Call Block).
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→ CO & SMDR—Call Forward to CO
→ Programming & Manager—Group Forward Set
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ Main
→ Overflow Queuing Busy
→ Overflow No Answer
Feature Manual
113
1.9 I
→ Miscellaneous
2.9.12 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member
PT Programming Manual
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
[626] Overflow Time
[627] Destination When All Busy
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
[630] Queuing Time Table
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.9.2
ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Description
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using
the selected distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents) are busy with calls.
When incoming calls exceed the number of available extensions, calls enter a queue (→ 1.9.5 ICD Group
Features—Queuing).
1. Distribution Method
One of the three distribution methods below can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group.
Distribution Method
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)
Description
Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is
received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the
preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the
extension that received the last call.
Extn.
A
Received
the last call.
114
Feature Manual
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Starts searching from
extn. B. (Skips extn. A.)
Extn.
D
1.9 I
Distribution Method
Priority Hunting
Description
An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for
the group.
1st Priority
2nd Priority
3rd Priority
...Priority
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Extn.
X
Always searches beginning with the
first extension assigned to the group.
Ring
All extensions in the group ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing:
Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension
in the group. The call can be answered by pressing the flashing
button even if no ring or a delayed time is set.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Immediately ring simultaneously.
Extn.
D
Delayed Ringing:
Rings after a
specified time delay.
2. Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting)
When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group, the group members can
receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature:
•
Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution
method for waiting calls.
•
Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. (→
1.3.9 Call Waiting Tone)
[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]
Programming Conditions
Result
Group Call
Group Call
Waiting Mode Distribution Method
Distribution
UCD
Priority Hunting
Ring
All
UCD/Priority Hunting/
Ring
Group Call Waiting
Capable
Distribution Method
Telephone
PT/PS with idle
UCD
ICD Group button
Priority Hunting
Any telephone
Not available*
Ring
*: Incoming calls enter the queue immediately. Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting
tone.
[Example]
• Group Call Waiting mode: All
• Group call distribution method
for idle extensions: UCD
All extensions hear the Call
Waiting tone (Ring).
Feature Manual
115
1.9 I
[ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting]
The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution
method as follows:
a) Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions (even when
the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call—
additional calls will wait in a queue.
b) UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button
located on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type: UCD
or Priority Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied—
additional calls will wait in a queue.
Note
In method b), if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call
distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied, the Group
Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension.
ICD Group 1
(Floating
extension
no.: 601)
3
2
ICD Group 2
(Floating
extension
no.: 602)
1
ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 2; 602 (Answering the Call)
3. No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method)
If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No
Answer time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member,
the call queues at the target extension until a group member becomes available.
Conditions
•
•
FWD/DND Extension
System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring extensions
which have the FWD or DND feature set. If set to ring, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. (→ 1.4.8
DND (Do Not Disturb), → 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
The Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature (→ 1.9.6 ICD Group
Features—VIP Call) and/or Wrap-up feature (→ 1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out). To use
the VIP Call feature and/or Wrap-up feature, Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ Main—Distribution Method
116
Feature Manual
1.9 I
→ Main—Call Waiting Distribution
→ Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
→ Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extensions
2.9.12 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Delayed Ring
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Wrap-up Timer
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Wrap-up Timer
PT Programming Manual
[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
1.9.3
ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Description
Members of an incoming call distribution group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the group manually.
They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to
their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls.
Wrap-up:
While logged in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls
after completing the previous call (Wrap-up time). While the Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming
call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that the extension user can
perform necessary tasks such as reporting on the previous call.
Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button.
[Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example]
Incoming call
Incoming call
Incoming call
Ready
Call
arrives
Extn.
101
Extn.
102
Ready
Extn.
103
Extn.
104
Extn.
105
Extn.
106
Answering a call
Waiting for call
Wrap-up
time expires
Wrap-up
button pressed
Not Ready
Finishing paperwork/
temporary break
Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready
Logged-in
Wrap-up
button pressed
Call
completed
Wrap-up
Extn.
102
Finishing paperwork
Logged-out
Conditions
•
•
It is programmable whether the last remaining logged-in extension can log out.
Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters:
Feature Manual
117
1.9 I
Light Pattern
Parameter
Usage
Red on
No parameter
Used with an ICD Group button, or with —
the floating extension number of an
incoming call distribution group, or with
(All).
Floating extension number of a Used to log in to or out of the specified Log-out
specified incoming call
incoming call distribution group.
Status
distribution group
•
•
•
•
Status
Slow red flashing
Wrap-up
Red on
Not Ready
Off
Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel)
When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call, neither the PS nor its wired telephone can
have Wrap-up time. (→ 1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Automatic Log-out
A member extension may be logged out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a
preprogrammed number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be
assigned for each incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one
incoming call distribution group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming
call distribution groups. It is possible to return to log-in mode manually.
The Automatic Log-out feature does not work for extensions in an incoming call distribution group using
the Ring distribution method (→ 1.9.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution).
Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR
Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. (→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording))
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Log-in / Log-out
118
Log-in Status
If an ICD Group button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group.
The light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button that includes the group number.
Wrap-up Timer
– The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
– Only calls from ICD Groups cannot be received during the wrap-up time. Other calls are received
as normal.
– The wrap-up timer does not work for PS Ring Groups.
Wrap-up Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows:
Light pattern
•
—
Used to log in to or out of all incoming After Log-out After Log-in
call distribution groups to which the
Operation
Operation
extension user belongs.
(All)
•
Off
Feature Manual
1.9 I
→ Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
→ No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
→ Last Extension Log-out
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Wrap-up Timer
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Wrap-up Timer
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Log-in / Log-out
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.35 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
1.9.4
ICD Group Features—Overflow
Description
When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity, they may be redirected to a preprogrammed
destination.
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following
conditions:
a)
b)
c)
d)
There is no space in the waiting queue.
The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in.
An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table.
The Overflow time expires.
Feature Manual
119
1.9 I
e) Manual Queue Redirection is performed.
[Available Destination]
The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night) (→1.17.4 Time Service). The destination can be assigned as follows,
depending on the above conditions.
•
For a) and b):
→ 2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow Queuing Busy—
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ [627] Destination When All Busy
•
For c), d), and e):
→ 2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer—
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Conditions
•
If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable:
(1) If the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message (OGM) was sent to it, or the call reached
an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System
Access)): The line is disconnected.
(2) In all other cases: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ Overflow Queuing Busy
→ Overflow No Answer
2.9.10 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
PT Programming Manual
120
Feature Manual
1.9 I
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
[626] Overflow Time
[627] Destination When All Busy
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
Feature Manual References
1.9.5 ICD Group Features—Queuing
1.9.5
ICD Group Features—Queuing
Description
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional
incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can wait in the queue is programmable.
While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be
assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (→ 1.17.4 Time Service). This PBX supports a
specified number of Queuing Time Tables which each have a specified number of sequences (specific
commands which are performed when a caller enters a queue). The following commands can be assigned
to each sequence when making a Queuing Time Table:
[Command Table]
Command
OGM xx
Wait
Sequence c
Overflow
Disconnect
None
(No command)
Description
Condition
An outgoing message is sent to the
caller. "xx" applies to the OGM
number.
After the OGM, Music on Hold will be
sent and the next event in the sequence
will be activated.
The caller waits for the specified time If an OGM has not been sent to the
while hearing a ringback tone or
caller, the caller hears a ringback tone.
Music on Hold.
If an OGM has been sent to the caller,
the caller hears Music on Hold.
Redirects to sequence c. "c" applies
to the sequence number.
None
Redirects to the overflow destination. None
Disconnects the line.
None
Redirects to the next sequence.
If assigned as sequence 01, the Queuing
Time Table will not be activated.
[Programming Example of Queuing Time Table]
Sequence*1
Queuing Time
Table No.
Sequence 01
Sequence 02
Sequence 03
Sequence 04
01
OGM 01
Wait 30 s
OGM 03
Overflow
02*2
OGM 02
Wait 30 s
OGM 04
None
Feature Manual
...
121
1.9 I
Sequence*1
Queuing Time
Table No.
Sequence 01
Sequence 02
Sequence 03
Sequence 04
...
:
:
:
:
:
03
:
*1:
*2:
→ 2.9.10 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—Queuing Sequence—
Sequence 01–16
→ [631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
If a call has not reached a destination by the time the final sequence is completed, the call will be
disconnected.
Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01:
Queuing Time Table 01
The call
enters
the queue.
Sequence 01
Sequence 02
Sequence 03
Sequence 04
OGM 01 is played.
Music on Hold
is played for
30 seconds.
OGM 03 is played.
We are sorry to
keep you holding.
All of our agents
are still handling
other calls. We
are transferring
you to the
operator.
The call is
redirected to
the overflow
destination.
Thank you for
calling Panasonic.
All of our agents are
currently handling
other calls. Please
hold the line. We
will answer your call
shortly.
The call is
answered
by the
overflow
destination.
The call is connected to an agent as
soon as one becomes available.
Conditions
•
•
•
If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing
Time Table:
Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires.
Manual Queue Redirection
It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the
Hurry-up button. (If the call is already ringing at an extension, it will not be redirected.)
This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.
Hurry-up Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual
Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable. The button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Off
No queued call
Red on
At or under the assigned number for Hurry-up
Rapid red flashing
Over the assigned number for Hurry-up
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
122
Calls in the Waiting Queue
Feature Manual
1.9 I
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ Overflow Queuing Busy
→ Overflow No Answer
→ Queuing Time Table
→ Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
→ Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extensions
2.9.10 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
2.9.15 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings—Call Waiting on VM Group
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
PT Programming Manual
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
[630] Queuing Time Table
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.9.4 ICD Group Features—Overflow
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.36 ICD Group Features—Manual Queue Redirection
1.9.6
ICD Group Features—VIP Call
Description
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple
groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in
priority order.
Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable
the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest
priority. When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions
Feature Manual
123
1.9 I
uniformly.
[Example]
In the call center, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call
distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode.
Calls have been distributed by DIL/CLI distribution.
(The circled numbers indicate the arrival order of the calls. )
ICD Group 1
(for VIPs)
ICD Group 2
(for general customers)
6
5
1
3
1st
Priority
Extn.
101
3rd
Priority
Extn.
102
Extn.
103
Distribution order: 1
2nd
Priority
ICD Group 3
(for special
customers)
3rd
Priority
2
7
4
8
6
2
4
From: Group 1 Group 3
3
5
7
8
Groups 2 and 4
ICD Group 4
(for general customers)
Calls have been distributed by DIL/CLI distribution.
(The circled numbers indicate the arrival order of the calls. )
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—VIP Call Mode
PT Programming Manual
None
1.9.7
Idle Extension Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle
member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming.
Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type.
This feature is also known as Station Hunting.
124
Feature Manual
1.9 I
Type
Description
Circular Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle
extension hunting group in a circular way.
Incoming call
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Assignment order
Terminated Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle
extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension.
Incoming call
Last
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Assignment order
Conditions
•
•
•
Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom, CO line, and doorphone calls to a single destination.
An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group.
If all the searched extensions are busy:
The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension
hunting group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (→ 1.17.4 Time Service).
[Available Destination]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Feature Manual
125
1.9 I
•
FWD/DND Mode
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set
FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.13 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
PT Programming Manual
[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
Feature Manual References
1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb)
1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.9.8
INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Description
CO lines are used to connect a PBX to a public network, i.e., the telephone company.
1. Distribution Method
Each CO line port can use a different method of directing calls to their destinations as they are received.
Distribution Method
Description
Direct In Line (DIL)
Details in
Directs a call to a preprogrammed destination, such • 1.4.5 DIL (Direct
as an operator, based on the CO line carrying the
In Line)
call.
Calling Line Identification Directs a call to its preprogrammed destination if the • 1.3.10 CLI
(CLI) Distribution
caller's telephone number and its CLI destination
(Calling Line
have been stored in the System Speed Dialing Table. Identification)
Distribution
Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is the more customizable call distribution method. It allows
calls from specific people to be directed to specific destinations, based on the callers' telephone
numbers. CLI distribution, when enabled for the current time mode, takes precedence over DIL
distribution.
2. Available Destination
The following destination types can be programmed as DIL or CLI destinations.
Destination Type
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
126
Feature Manual
Availability
1.9 I
Destination Type
Availability
PS
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
3. Intercept Routing
After a call has been directed to its DIL or CLI destination, the following Intercept Routing features, if
programmed, can redirect the call.
Type
Description
Details in
No Answer (IRNA)
If a called party does not answer a call within a
• 1.9.9 Intercept
preprogrammed time period (Intercept time), the call Routing
is redirected to a preprogrammed destination.
Busy
If a called party is already handling another call, the
new call is redirected to a preprogrammed
destination.
DND
If a called party is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the
call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination.
No Destination
If a destination is not assigned, the call is redirected • 1.9.10 Intercept
to an operator.
Routing—No
Destination
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
None
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual
127
1.9 I
1.9.9
Intercept Routing
Description
Redirects an incoming CO line call or intercom call to a preprogrammed destination when the original
destination does not, or can not, answer the call. There are four types of Intercept Routing, described below.
Type
No Answer (IRNA)
Description
If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period
(IRNA Timer), the call is redirected to a preprogrammed intercept destination.
The assigned intercept destination of the extension port.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→ Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—
Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Intercept Timer—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
→ [203] Intercept Time
Busy
If a called party is already handling a call, new calls are handled as follows:
– the call is redirected to the preprogrammed Intercept Routing—
Busy destination, if enabled through system programming.
– If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not enabled, the caller
will hear a busy tone. However, if the call is made through an LCOT
card, the caller hears a ringback tone.
DND
If a called party is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the call is redirected to a
preprogrammed intercept destination.
No Destination
If a call has no destination (i.e., if a destination is not assigned), the call is
redirected to an operator. (→ 1.9.10 Intercept Routing—No Destination)
Intercept Routing redirects calls to destinations based on the original destination of the call, as shown in the
table below. Different intercept destinations can be programmed for each time mode. Note that calls
redirected by Intercept Routing—No Answer/Busy/DND are directed to the same destination, while Intercept
Routing—Busy is directed to a separate destination, and that the intercept destination for Intercept
Routing—No Destination is always an operator.
128
Feature Manual
1.9 I
When the original destination is:
•
•
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
The Available Intercept Destination is:
The destination assigned to the original extension.
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Intercept Destination
→ Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Intercept Destination
→ Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy
→ [604] Extension Intercept Destination
•
ICD Group
The ICD Group Overflow destination assigned to the
group. (→ 1.9.4 ICD Group Features—Overflow)
→ 2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings—Overflow No Answer—Time out &
Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
→ [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
•
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
The destination assigned to the first extension of the
VM group.
•
DISA*
If all DISA ports are busy when a call is made using
DISA, one of the following can be selected through
system programming:
•
Disable: Busy tone is sent to the caller.
•
Operator: The call will be redirected to the
operator.
•
AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the
destination assigned to that AA number.
→ 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—
Option 1—DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA
ports are busy
•
PS Ring Group**
Not assignable (Intercept Routing is not available.)
(TAFAS)**
•
•
External Pager
Analog Remote Maintenance
*
Intercept Routing for DISA will redirect a call only if all of the Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
ports are busy. If Intercept Routing is activated after a call from DISA reaches the destination
extension, the Intercept Routing settings assigned to that extension will be applied.
Feature Manual
129
1.9 I
**
By assigning the forward destination of a Virtual PS to a PS Ring Group or external pager, and
assigning Intercept Routing destinations to the Virtual PS, calls to these destinations will be redirected
to the Intercept Routing destination of the Virtual PS.
Programming Example
<Forward Destination of Virtual PS>
Ext. No. of the Virtual PS FWD Destination
2001
600
...
...
"600" is an example of a
Floating Extension No.
for the External Pager
<Intercept Destination of Virtual PS>
Intercept Destination
Ext. No. of the Virtual PS
Day
Lunch Break
2001
1001
1001
...
...
...
1001
...
Night
...
1001
...
...
...
When extension 2001 is called from another extension or is the first destination
of an incoming CO line call, etc., the call will ring at extension 600 (external pager)
first, and then ring at the intercept destination (extension 1001) after the IRNA
Timer expires.
[Available Intercept Destination]
The following can be used as intercept destinations:
Intercept Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT)
PS
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
130
Feature Manual
Availability
1.9 I
Conditions
[General]
•
If the intercept destination is busy or in DND mode and therefore cannot receive the call:
a) When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—No Answer, the call is sent back to the
original destination and continues to ring at the original destination until answered.
b) When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—Busy, the call waits at the original
destination. If the extension has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone.
c) When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—DND, the call waits at the original destination
•
•
and it rings.
If the intercept destination can, but does not, answer the call:
The call continues to ring at the intercept destination until answered.
Intercept Routing—DND on/off
Intercept Routing—DND can each be enabled or disabled for the entire system, through system
programming. If enabled, calls will be routed to the appropriate destination.
If disabled, a call to an extension which is in DND mode will be handled as described below, depending
on the type of line carrying the call.
→ 2.15.3 [9-3] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND)
a) LCOT Card: The caller will hear a ringback tone. If in DND mode, the extension will ring.
b) All other lines: An outside caller will hear a busy tone and an extension caller will hear a DND tone.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Idle Extension Hunting
If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group, calls to that extension will not be
redirected by Intercept Routing—Busy/DND. If the extension is busy or in DND mode, calls to that
extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group.
Intercept Routing for intercom calls can be enabled or disabled on a system basis.
→ 2.15.3 [9-3] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
IRNA Timer
The IRNA timer can be set on a system basis and an extension basis for each time mode (day, lunch,
break, night).
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—Intercept No Answer
Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
The Intercept Routing destination for each time mode will not apply for Intercept Routing—Busy. When
the original destination is busy, the call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination
assigned through system programming. If no destination is assigned the caller will hear a busy tone.
When a call arrives at an extension that is currently receiving a call, the call will be redirected to the
extension's Intercept Routing—No Answer destination for each time mode.
The time modes that are selected for CO line calls arriving at extensions and VM groups are decided
on a tenant basis.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→ Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer—Time out & Manual
Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Manual
131
1.9 I
→ Intercept Destination
→ Intercept No Answer Time
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→ Intercept Destination
→ Intercept No Answer Time
2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports
are busy
2.15.3 [9-3] Miscellaneous
→ Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND)
→ Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed)
→ Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
PT Programming Manual
[203] Intercept Time
[604] Extension Intercept Destination
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
Feature Manual References
1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb)
1.9.10 Intercept Routing—No Destination
Description
Directs a CO line call to an operator when the call has no assigned destination.
Conditions
•
•
•
Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off
Intercept Routing—No Destination can be enabled or disabled for the entire system, through system
programming. If disabled, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
If an operator is not assigned:
The default intercept destination will be the extension connected to the lowest numbered port, on the
card installed in the lowest numbered slot.
Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to calls from doorphones.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.15.3 [9-3] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not
programmed)
PT Programming Manual
[006] Operator Assignment
132
Feature Manual
1.9 I
Feature Manual References
1.12.3 Operator Features
1.9.11 Intercom Call
Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers and names are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and name of the
other extension are shown on display PTs during intercom calls.
DSS Button
It is possible to call another extension by simply pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection
(DSS) button. Any flexible button can be customized as a DSS button.
Call Directory—Extension Dialing
A KX-T7737 analog proprietary telephone (APT) user can make a call by selecting stored names on
the display.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user
immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected.
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party's preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice) temporarily. By
doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may
deny voice-calling.
Tone after Dialing
After dialing an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:
Type
Description
Ringback Tone
Indicates the called party is being called.
Confirmation Tone
Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Busy Tone
Indicates the called party is busy.
DND Tone
Indicates the called party has set DND.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→ Main—Extension Number
→ Main—Extension Name
→ Option 4—Intercom Call by Voice
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
Feature Manual
133
1.9 I
→ Extension Number
→ Extension Name
PT Programming Manual
[003] Extension Number
[004] Extension Name
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
1.3.3 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
1.4.1 Directories
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.9.12 Internal Call Block
Description
Internal calls can be restricted based on the Class of Service (COS) assigned to the caller and to the called
party.
[Programming Example: Internal Call Block]
Called Party
Caller
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
COS...
Block
Block
Block
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
Block
Block
Block
In this example:
a) COS 1 can make calls to all extensions.
b) COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only. (COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2.)
c) COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only.
134
Feature Manual
1.9 I
COS 1
Extn. 100
Extn. 101
COS 2
Extn. 102
COS 3
Extn. 103
Extn. 104
Extn. 105
Extn. 106
Conditions
•
•
•
Internal Call Block also prohibits certain features, such as Walking Extension and Walking COS, from
being performed between certain extensions.
Any extension can make an Operator Call regardless of the Internal Call Block setting of its COS. (→
1.12.3 Operator Features)
Because each doorphone port is assigned a COS, the Internal Call Block feature can restrict certain
extensions from calling certain doorphones. (→ 1.4.10 Doorphone Call)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block—COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call
from Other Extension 1–64
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—COS
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—COS
2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay—COS Number
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Feature Manual
135
1.10 L
1.10 L
1.10.1 LED Indication
Description
The LED of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding
Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group
Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS
1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
•
•
•
Incoming call: Red flashing
Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons
Line Status
Button:
Light
Pattern
Off
Green on
Slow green
flashing
Moderate
green
flashing
Rapid green
flashing
Red on
Slow red
flashing
Rapid red
flashing
136
Feature Manual
CO Line Status
S-CO
G-CO
L-CO
Idle
Intercom
Line Status
Incoming Call
Distribution
(ICD) Group
Line Status
INTERCOM
ICD Group
This extension is using the line.
This extension is holding the line.
This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold
or using the line for an Unattended Conference.
Incoming
Incoming call
call/Privacy
Release
–
Incoming
–
Other
call for
extensions
another
are using
extension/
all CO lines
Another
in the trunk
extension
group.
is using the
line/Another
extension
has the line
on Exclusive
Hold.
–
–
–
Another
extension
is holding
the line.
Incoming call to the ICD group in Ring –
distribution method
This extension
is logged out
of the ICD
group.
–
–
1.10 L
3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
Corresponding
Extension
Status Button
DSS
Light Pattern
Off
Idle
Red on
Busy/Incoming call*1/DND for CO line calls
Rapid red flashing
Incoming call*2
*1:
Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled.
*2:
Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled.
4. Flashing Light Patterns
1s
Slow Flashing
Moderate Flashing
Rapid Flashing
Conditions
•
•
The incoming CO line call shows on the buttons in the following priority:
ICD Group→S-CO→G-CO→L-CO→INTERCOM
The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming calls can be set to "Off" through system programming.
In this case, the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
→ Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
→ Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
→ Option 4—DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.3.2 Call Hold
1.3.13 Conference
1.6.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Feature Manual
137
1.10 L
1.9.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
1.13.10 Privacy Release
1.10.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following
three line preferences.
Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming
(Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming).
Type
Description
No Line
Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an
incoming call after you go off-hook.
Prime Line
Answers a call arriving at a CO button or ICD Group button (on which
the "Prime Line" is assigned) simply by going off-hook. This works
even when multiple calls are received simultaneously.
Ringing Line (default)
Answers the longest ringing call when multiple calls arrive at one's own
telephone simply by going off-hook.
Conditions
[Prime Line]
•
The priority of the incoming call is as follows:
1) The call arriving at a button on which the "Prime Line" is assigned.
2) The call arriving at the INTERCOM button.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—Incoming Preferred Line
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—Incoming Preferred Line
PT Programming Manual
None
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
138
Feature Manual
1.10 L
1.10.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Description
Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of
seizing a line (Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing) that is used each time the user goes off-hook.
Method
Description
ICM
When an extension user goes off-hook, an extension line is selected
automatically.
Idle Line
When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle CO line is selected
automatically from the assigned trunk groups.
No Line
When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make
a call, the user must select the desired line manually.
Prime Line
When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected
automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons: SCO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group.
Conditions
•
•
Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button
or a Memory Dialing button, such as One-touch Dialing, before going off-hook.
To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a
COS basis. Also trunk groups available for Idle Line Access should be assigned.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—Outgoing Preferred Line
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—Outgoing Preferred Line
PT Programming Manual
[103] Idle Line Access (Local Access)
[500] Trunk Group Number
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.10.4 Local Alarm Information
Description
When the PBX detects an error, the System Alarm button on the proprietary telephone (PT) of an extension
which is allowed to use this feature through system programming (a maximum of two extensions per PBX),
Feature Manual
139
1.10 L
lights red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error
number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest. The System Alarm button light turns off
automatically after all error numbers have been displayed.
For details about the errors and their solutions, refer to the Installation Manual.
[Error Example]
ERR #100 (10000)
(1)
(2)
[Explanation]
Number in the
Example
Item
Description
(1)
Error Code
Shows three-digit error code.
(2)
Sub Code
Shows five-digit sub code (XYYZZ).
X: Cabinet number (1–4)
YY: Slot number (00–11)
ZZ: Physical port number (01–08)
Conditions
•
•
•
System Alarm Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the System Alarm button.
The alarm information will be logged on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), if enabled
through system programming.
The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday.
Installation Manual References
4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.5.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
2.16.1 [10-1] Main
→ SMDR—Print Information—Error Log
140
Feature Manual
1.10 L
→ Maintenance—Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
→ Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Set
→ Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Hour
→ Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Minute
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Feature Manual
141
1.11 M
1.11 M
1.11.1 Manager Features
Description
An extension assigned as a manager (manager extension) is allowed to use certain features which most
extensions cannot. Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions are manager
extensions and can therefore use the following features:
Feature
Manager
Manager
Programming Password
Change
Description
Changes the manager password.
Manager
Password
Details in
Required
–
Required
• 1.19.1
Verification Code
Entry
Remote PIN Clear Clears the extension PIN of an
Required
extension remotely, or a verification
code PIN. PIN Lock is also
unlocked.
• 1.5.6 Extension
PIN (Personal
Identification
Number)
• 1.19.1
Verification Code
Entry
Remote
Extension Dial
Lock
Sets or cancels the Extension Dial Required
Lock on an extension remotely.
• 1.5.4 Extension
Dial Lock
Dial Tone Transfer
Changes the Toll Restriction (TRS) Not
level of an extension temporarily,
required
allowing the extension user to make
a normally unauthorized call.
• 1.4.4 Dial Tone
Transfer
Outgoing Message (OGM)
Records and plays back OGMs.
Not
required
• 1.12.1 OGM
(Outgoing
Message)
Time Service
Switches the time mode manually.
Not
required
• 1.17.4 Time
Service
BGM—External
Turns the External BGM on and off. Not
required
• 1.2.1 BGM
(Background
Music)
Verification Code Sets a Verification Code PIN for
each Verification Code.
Personal
Identification
Number (PIN) Set
Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such
142
Feature Manual
1.11 M
calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent
use, we strongly recommend:
a) Keeping PINs secret.
b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c) Changing PINs regularly.
•
Manager Password
Only one manager password can be assigned per PBX.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Manager
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
PT Programming Manual
[112] Manager Password
[511] Manager Assignment
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
2.1 Manager Service Features
3.2.2 Manager Programming
1.11.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES
Description
An extension user can store frequently dialed numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the PBX system
data. A stored number is dialed automatically with a simple operation.
1. Features
Feature
Storing Method
One-touch Dialing
•
•
Personal Programming
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
Last Number Redial
(Outgoing Call Log)
The last or most recent dialed numbers are
automatically stored.
Details in
• 1.12.2 Onetouch Dialing
• 1.15.1 Redial,
Last Number
Feature Manual
143
1.11 M
Feature
Speed
Dialing
Storing Method
Details in
Personal
•
•
•
Personal Programming
Personal Operation with the Feature Number
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
• 1.16.3 Speed
Dialing, Personal
System
System Programming
• 1.16.4 Speed
Dialing, System
Quick Dialing
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
• 1.14.1 Quick
Dialing
Hot Line
•
•
•
Personal Programming
Personal Operation with the Feature Number
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
• 1.8.6 Hot Line
Incoming Call Log
Incoming call information is automatically stored.
• 1.3.3 Call Log,
Incoming
2. Valid Input
Displayed while
Entering
Input
Description
0–9/ /#
0–9/ /#
Store digits,
and # by pressing the corresponding buttons.
PAUSE (Pause)
P
Store a dialing pause by pressing the PAUSE button. (→ 1.13.4
Pause Insertion)
FLASH/RECALL F
(Hooking)*
Store a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/
RECALL button at the beginning of the number. (→ 1.5.1 EFA
(External Feature Access))
INTERCOM
(Secret)*
[]
Conceal all or part of the number by pressing the INTERCOM
button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be
concealed. It is programmable whether the concealed part will
be shown on the SMDR (→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message
Detail Recording)).
TRANSFER
(Transfer)*
T
Store a transfer command by pressing the TRANSFER button
at the beginning of the number (used only for One-touch
Dialing). (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer)
[Example] Storing "T + 305"= Transferring a call to extension
305.
*: Available only when in the system/personal programming mode
[Secret Dialing Example]
When storing the number "9-123-456-7890", to conceal the telephone number "123-456-7890",
Enter 9
Notes
•
144
Feature Manual
INTERCOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
INTERCOM .
It is possible to store a Memory Dialing feature number at the beginning of Memory Dialing
numbers.
1.11 M
•
It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialing location.
Conditions
•
CO Line Access by Memory Dialing
A specific CO Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory Dialing.
However, if Memory Dialing is done after selecting a CO line, the stored CO Line Access number is
ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected CO line.
1.11.3 Message Waiting
Description
When an extension user calls another extension that does not or cannot answer the call, he or she can leave
a Message Waiting notification. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user's telephone will
light, indicating that a call was missed or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or the
Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature is waiting. A Message button can be used to call the caller back or
listen to the message.
When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the Message button on it lights or the Message/
Ringer Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit Message button while on-hook shows the caller's information as
shown below:
[Example]
105:Tom Smith
--- Extension no. and name of who left the message
Message buttons
This extension
ICD Group
Other extension*
* This button is useful, for example, when a
secretary checks messages left for the
boss (Boss & Secretary Feature).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Message Button
Any flexible button can be assigned as a Message button. This button can be used on a PT which does
not have the MESSAGE button (fixed button), or can be used on any PT to access messages left for
another extension or for an incoming call distribution (ICD) group.
Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting
If Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been
left on the extension. (→ 1.4.3 Dial Tone)
It is possible to leave a Message Waiting notification while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND
tone.
Messages are always left on the original destination extension, regardless of that extension's FWD
settings. (→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left.
Feature Manual
145
1.11 M
•
If the extension that received a notification calls back the extension that sent the notification, and the
call is answered, the notification will be cleared automatically. However, if a voice message has been
left on the VPS, whether the notification is cleared or not depends on the VPS settings.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Message Waiting Set
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3—Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.37 Message Waiting
1.11.4 Music on Hold
Description
Music can be played to any party on hold. The following audio sources are available:
a) Internal audio source
b) External audio source
c) Tone
Music Source Assignment
Only one external music port is available. If BGM is selected, it is possible to select whether external music
port, internal music port 1, or internal music port 2 is assigned to BGM.
Conditions
•
•
•
146
Hardware Requirement: User-supplied audio device (CD player, radio, etc.) when an external music
source is assigned.
Volume Control
It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external audio source.
Each tenant can select a music source to use for Music on Hold. The type of call determines which
tenant's music source is used, as follows:
Feature Manual
1.11 M
Type
Incoming Intercom Calls/
Outgoing Calls
Incoming CO Line Calls
Music Source
Selected based on the tenant setting to which the extension
user belongs.
Selected based on the tenant setting of the distribution method
(DIL).
After finishing an incoming CO line call, if an extension user makes another call using the FLASH/
RECALL (→ 1.6.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate) or EFA button (→ 1.5.1 EFA (External Feature Access)),
and puts the call on hold, the music source is selected based on the tenant setting to which the
extension user belongs.
(→1.17.2 Tenant Service)
Installation Manual References
2.9.1 Connection of Peripherals
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH—MOH—(Music On Hold)
PT Programming Manual
[710] Audio Source Selection for BGM
[711] Music on Hold
1.11.5 Mute
Description
During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone or the handset
microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the builtin speaker or the handset receiver. The user can hear the other party's voice during Mute. Only your voice
will be muted.
Conditions
•
This feature is available on all PTs that have the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
Operating Manual References
1.3.38 Mute
Feature Manual
147
1.12 O
1.12 O
1.12.1 OGM (Outgoing Message)
Description
An extension assigned as a manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the
following features:
Feature
Usage
Details in
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear a • 1.4.6 DISA
message.
(Direct Inward
System Access)
Queuing Feature
If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call • 1.9.5 ICD Group
distribution (ICD) group, callers waiting in a queue will
Features—
hear a message.
Queuing
Timed Reminder
When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm, the user will • 1.17.3 Timed
hear a message.
Reminder
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement:
The MSG card
Number of Messages and Recording Time
The PBX can record a maximum of 32 messages can be recorded. The total recording time of the PBX
is 8 minutes.
A floating extension number is assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) (default: 5 + two-digit OGM
number).
Each MSG card can play two messages simultaneously. Adding additional MSG cards increases the
number of messages that can be played simultaneously, but does not increase the total recording time
or the number of messages that can be recorded.
[Example]
Up to 4 messages can be
played simultaneously for
callers.
Up to 2 messages can be
played simultaneously for
callers.
PBX
PBX
MSG
Card
Total message recording time:
8 minutes max.
MSG
Card
MSG
Card
Total message recording time:
8 minutes max.
Note
When an additional MSG card is added, it is blank—all necessary messages will need to be stored
in the new card. This can be done in two ways:
148
Feature Manual
1.12 O
a) By installing the new MSG card then recording each message again. The PBX will
automatically store the new recordings in each MSG card.
b) By transferring messages from the PBX to a PC using KX-TAW848 Maintenance Console,
•
•
then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG card installed.
The same message can be played to multiple callers simultaneously.
Recording Methods
a) Record voice messages through the extension telephone.
b) Transfer prerecorded voice messages from an external audio source to the PBX via an external
music port.
Note
Record voice messages only; avoid the recording of music.
•
•
•
•
After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation.
A progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages for a preprogrammed time
period, or while clearing a prerecorded message assigned to a floating extension number.
Record a message when PBX traffic is light, such as early morning or late evening.
When a manager tries to record a message, he or she will hear a ringback tone if a message channel
is in use. When all ports of the MSG card(s) become idle, the manager will hear the progress tone for
a preprogrammed time period, then the PBX will automatically switch to the recording mode.
Installation Manual References
2.5.3 MSG2 Card (KX-TAW84891)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.5.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
2.5.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Progress Tone Continuation
Time before Recording Message
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—OGM Record / Clear / Playback
2.9.10 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—Queuing Sequence—Sequence
01–16
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
→ Floating Extension Number
→ Delayed Ring
PT Programming Manual
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Manual
149
1.12 O
Operating Manual References
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)
1.12.2 One-touch Dialing
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is
possible by storing the number, such as an extension number, telephone number, or feature number in a
One-touch Dialing button.
Conditions
•
•
One-touch Dialing Button
Any flexible button can be customized as a One-touch Dialing button.
Full One-touch Dialing
There is no need to go off-hook before pressing a One-touch Dialing button.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5—Flexible Button Programming Mode
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5—Flexible Button Programming Mode
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.39 One-touch Dialing
150
Feature Manual
1.12 O
1.12.3 Operator Features
Description
Any extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group can be designated as an operator.
This PBX supports the following types of operators:
Type
Description
PBX operator
An extension or ICD group can be assigned as a PBX operator for
each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Tenant operator
An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a
tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or ICD
group of another tenant.
[Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3.
Operator Call:
An extension user can call an operator by dialing the preprogrammed Operator Call feature number. The
destination of the Operator Call depends on the following:
– If the Tenant Service is not in use:
The call is directed to the PBX operator according to the corresponding time mode.
– If the Tenant Service is in use:
The call is directed to the extension’s tenant operator. If a tenant operator is not assigned, the call
is directed to the PBX operator. In this case, the current time mode of the extension’s tenant is used
to determine the PBX operator that the call is directed to.
If neither a tenant operator nor a PBX operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
Conditions
•
•
An extension or ICD group can be assigned as both a tenant operator and the PBX operator.
The same tenant operator can be assigned as the operator for multiple tenants.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)
PT Programming Manual
[006] Operator Assignment
Feature Manual References
1.17.2 Tenant Service
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls— Operator Call
Feature Manual
151
1.13 P
1.13 P
1.13.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a voice announcement to several people at once.
The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external
pager (loudspeaker) which belong to a paging group.
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone.
It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.
Paging Deny
It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis.
Paging Group
Each paging group consists of extension user groups and the external pager. One extension user group
or the external pager can belong to several paging groups.
(→ 1.7.1 GROUP FEATURES)
[Example]
Paging Group 01
Paging Group 02
Paging Group 03
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Paging Group 04
Pager
[Programming Example]
Paging Group
No.
01
02
03
04
05
: Constituent
152
Feature Manual
Extension User Group No. *1
001
002
003
...
External Pager *2
1.13 P
*1:
*2:
→ 2.9.6 [3-4] Paging Group
or
2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
→ [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
→ 2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
→ [641] External Pager of a Paging Group
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Extensions which cannot be paged are:
– Portable stations (PSs)
– Single line telephones (SLTs)
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in Paging DND mode
These extensions cannot be paged, but can answer a page.
External Pager Priority
The external pager can be used with the following priorities:
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) → Paging → Background Music (BGM)
(→ 1.17.1 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station), 1.2.1 BGM (Background Music))
Volume Control
The volume level of pages heard from the external pager can be changed through system
programming.
Paging DND
When Do Not Disturb (DND) (→ 1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb)) is set for incoming calls, it is
programmable whether an extension receives paging through system programming.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Group Paging
→ Group Paging Answer
→ Paging Deny Set / Cancel
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
→ Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
→ Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH—Paging—EPG (External Pager)
2.9.6 [3-4] Paging Group
2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Paging Deny
PT Programming Manual
[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[641] External Pager of a Paging Group
Feature Manual
153
1.13 P
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.40 Paging
1.13.2 Paralleled Telephone
Description
By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX
without adding additional extension cards.
Both wired and wireless telephones can be connected in parallel. Single line telephones (SLTs) and analog
proprietary telephones (APTs) can be connected through just one extension port. Additionally, portable
stations (PSs) can be linked to other telephones wirelessly and used as "paired" extensions.
The different type of parallel connections are described below.
Features
Parallel Mode
Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode
Descriptions
Connections
Allows an SLT to be connected to an APT which is
connected to a pre-installed hybrid port of the PBX.
When parallel mode is enabled, the two telephones
function as follows:
•
Both share the extension number of the
telephone connected directly to the PBX (main
telephone).
•
Either telephone can make or answer a call.
APT + SLT
For information on this type of parallel connection,
refer to the Wireless XDP Parallel mode feature. (→
1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode).
PBX
SLT
APT
Extn. 102 Extn. 102
APT/SLT + PS
PBX
APT
Extn. 101
PS
Extn. 101
SLT
Extn. 102
PS
Extn. 102
154
Feature Manual
1.13 P
Conditions
[APT + SLT]
•
•
If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, a three-party call is established. If one user
goes on-hook, the other user continues the call.
An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is:
– playing background music (BGM)
– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.
Installation Manual References
1.4.3 System Capacity
2.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
PT Programming Manual
None
1.13.3 Password Security
Description
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of
programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password
PT
PC
Description
Format
System Password (PT) for
User
Used to access user-level PT programming. The specific
PT programming items that may be programmed at user
level can be selected through system programming item.
4 – 10
digits
System Password (PT) for
Administrator
Used to access administrator-level PT programming. All PT
programming settings are available.
System Password (PC) for
User
Used with the user-level programmer code to access user- 4 – 10
level PC programming. The installer can specify which
characters
system programming settings are available.
System Password (PC) for
Administrator
Used with the administrator-level programmer code to
access administrator-level PC programming. The installer
can specify which system programming settings are
available.
System Password (PC) for
Installer
Used with the installer-level programmer code to access
installer-level PC programming. All system programming
settings are available.
Feature Manual
155
1.13 P
For more information about programmer codes, see Section 2.1.2 Access Levels in the PC Programming
Manual.
Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that
you program the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in
system passwords, refer to Section 1.1.2 Entering Characters in the PC Programming Manual.
6. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a
backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogram it.
Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information
on how to back up the system data, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do
not allow unauthorized access to these files.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
1.1.2 Entering Characters
2.1.2 Access Levels
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—Password
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.13.4 Pause Insertion
Description
Pressing a PAUSE button inserts a preprogrammed Pause time between digits of a user-dialed number
before the number is dialed out, allowing certain numbers separated with a pause to be used to access
certain features (e.g., access codes, seizing idles lines, etc.).
When a pause is needed, pauses must be inserted manually (pressing the PAUSE button) in all cases,
except for the following access codes where a pause is automatically inserted between the user-dialed
access code and the subsequent digits:
a) Host PBX Access code (→ 1.8.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX))
b) Special Carrier Access code (→ 1.16.2 Special Carrier Access Code)
156
Feature Manual
1.13 P
c) Second Dial Tone Waiting code
Conditions
•
•
•
•
The length of a pause is programmable for each CO line.
Numbers stored in Memory Dialing can contain pauses.
When a Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialed after seizing a CO line, a preprogrammed number of
pauses are inserted after the code.
ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits
when the ARS mode is enabled. (1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Pause Time
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
PT Programming Manual
[416] LCOT Pause Time
1.13.5 PC Programming
Description
Although many PBX features can be programmed using a proprietary telephone (PT) (→ 1.13.15 PT
Programming), a PC connected to the PBX can use the KX-TAW848 Maintenance Console software to
program in further detail. System programming, diagnosis, and data upload/download can be performed
either through on-site programming or remote programming.
1) On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to
the PBX.
2) Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the
PBX via a CO line.
1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming
Method
Required
Hardware
Description
Serial Interface
(RS-232C port)
The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface
(RS-232C port) of the PBX.
—
USB
The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port.
—
Modem
(connected to SLT
port)*
The PC is connected to a modem, which is then connected RMT card and
to an SLT port of the PBX. Use the modem to dial the
user-supplied
floating extension number (default: 599) assigned to the
modem
analog remote maintenance feature to access the PBX.
Feature Manual
157
1.13 P
*
Remote access must be enabled through system programming when performing on-site
programming via modem.
2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming
Method
Off-site modem
Description
Required
Hardware
Call the PBX and have the call directed to the floating
RMT card and
extension number (default: 599) assigned to the analog remote user-supplied
maintenance feature using one of the following methods:
modem
Direct Access: Using the off-site modem, dial a telephone
number with the modem which will direct your call (via Direct
In Line (DIL) distribution) to the floating extension number
assigned to the analog remote maintenance feature.
DISA: Using a telephone, dial a telephone number which will
direct your call (via DIL distribution) to a floating extension
number used by the Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
feature (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)). Next,
dial the floating extension number assigned to the analog
remote maintenance feature. Then access the PBX with the
modem.
Call Transfer: Using a telephone, dial a telephone number
which will direct your call to an operator (or other extension of
the PBX) and request to be transferred to the floating
extension number assigned to the analog remote maintenance
feature. (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer) Then access the PBX with the
modem.
On-site modem
The modem is connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C
User-supplied
port) and also to either an extension port which is assigned as modem
the DIL destination, or to a CO line directly. AT commands can
be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the
Serial Interface (RS-232C port) and can be programmed
beforehand, through system programming, to initialize the
modem. AT commands can also be sent manually in the PT
system programming mode.
Conditions
•
•
•
158
Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied when a second
party tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT.
Programmer Code and Password for System Programming
To access system programming, a programmer code and its password must be entered. For more
details, see Section 1.13.3 Password Security.
Remote Programming Limitation
It is possible to disable remote access through system programming. Disabling this feature will also
disable the ability to perform on-site programming via modem.
Feature Manual
1.13 P
•
If an extension user sets Walking Extension at the same time that the extension's data is being
programmed through PC programming, the data may not be transferred properly. (→ 1.20.2 Walking
Extension)
Installation Manual References
2.5.6 RMT Card (KX-TAW84896)
3.1 Overview
3.2 Connection
3.3 Installation of the PC Programming Software
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.16.1 [10-1] Main
→ RS-232C—External Modem Command—Automatic Initialization
→ RS-232C—External Modem Command—Manual Initialization 1–Manual Initialization 5
→ Remote
→ Password—System Password - PC Programming—User Level
→ Password—System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level
→ Password—System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level
PT Programming Manual
[801] External Modem Control
[810] Remote Programming
[811] Modem Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
1.4.5 DIL (Direct In Line)
1.13.3 Password Security
1.13.6 Power Failure Restart
Description
When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts, loads its stored data automatically, and logs the
event as a System Restart in the error log.
Conditions
•
In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is
no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) (→ 1.1.4 Automatic
Callback Busy (Camp-on)) and Call Park (→ 1.3.5 Call Park).
Feature Manual
159
1.13 P
1.13.7 Power Failure Transfer
Description
If the power supply to the PBX fails, specific single line telephones (SLTs) are automatically connected to
specific CO line (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to the
Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only CO line conversations handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.
Conditions
•
•
Only CO line calls can be made during a power failure. All other features do not work.
Only ports 1 and 2 of the pre-installed LCOT card and ports 1 and 2 of the pre-installed hybrid ports
can be used for Power Failure Connections.
Note
The Power Failure Connections between the LCOT card and hybrid ports are automatically kept
so that the conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the Main Board is
recovering.
Installation Manual References
2.10.1 Power Failure Connections
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
None
PT Programming Manual
None
1.13.8 Predialing
Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) user can check and correct the number to be dialed on-hook. The call
will be initiated after going off-hook.
Conditions
•
Storing the Predialed Number in Personal Speed Dialing
The predialed number can be stored in Personal Speed Dialing by pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE
button. (→ 1.16.3 Speed Dialing, Personal) In this case, the extension will enter personal programming
mode automatically so that a name can be assigned to the stored number.
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
160
Feature Manual
1.13 P
1.13.9 Printing Message
Description
An extension user can select a message to be output on SMDR. Up to eight messages can be
preprogrammed in the Printing Message table, and are available to all extensions connected to the PBX. A
message can contain the "%" symbol, which requires a number to be entered in its place when the message
is selected at an extension.
Depending on the content of the preprogrammed messages, this feature can be used to record a variety of
information, which can be output on SMDR to, for example, a connected PC.
[Example]
If message 1 is preprogrammed as "Started work", and message 2 as "Finished work", employees can sign
in by selecting message 1 when starting work, and sign out by selecting message 2 when finishing. A
connected PC can then be used to generate employee work records.
Conditions
•
Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Printing Message
2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.41 Printing Message
1.13.10 Privacy Release
Description
By default, all conversations which take place on CO lines, extension lines and doorphone lines are
protected from others interrupting the conversation (Automatic Privacy).
Privacy Release allows a proprietary telephone (PT) or portable station (PS) user to suspend Automatic
Privacy for an existing CO line call on the S-CO button in order to establish a three-party call.
System programming is required to enable or disable this feature.
Feature Manual
161
1.13 P
Conditions
•
•
•
S-CO Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the S-CO button.
Privacy Release Time
Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined.
This feature overrides Data Line Security (→ 1.4.1 Data Line Security) and Executive Busy Override
Deny (→ 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override).
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.15 Conference
1.13.11 PS Connection
Description
A Panasonic KX-TD7680 or KX-TD7690 portable station (PS) can be used in place of a proprietary
telephone (PT), providing wireless access to PBX features and call handling.
1. Registration
Before a PS can be used, it must be registered with the PBX through system programming and
assigned an extension number.
→ 2.7.12 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration—Registration
→ [690] PS Registration
Because a PS transmits radio waves, it is possible that a PS belonging to a neighboring PBX can be
registered to your PBX. To prevent this sort of unauthorized registration, a personal identification
number (PIN) can be programmed for this PBX that must be entered on the PS during registration. This
PIN, if programmed, is only used during the PS registration process.
→ 2.7.12 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration—Personal Identification Number
→ [691] PS Termination
Each PS can be registered to more than one PBX if necessary, and registration can be canceled if a
PS will no longer be used with one of these PBXs.
→ 2.7.12 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration—De-registration
→ [692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration
162
Feature Manual
1.13 P
2. Connection
There are two ways a PS can be used.
As an Extension
A PS is assigned its own extension number when it is registered to a PBX. The PS can use this
extension number to make and receive calls, just as a wired telephone can. A PS can be a member of
an incoming call distribution (ICD) group, can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls, etc.,
just as a wired telephone can.
A PS can also be a member of a PS ring group (→ 1.13.14 PS Ring Group). A PS ring group is a way
for several PSs to be notified of an incoming call simultaneously, but does not offer all of the features
provided by an ICD group. (→ 1.9.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
A PS can share an extension number with a wired telephone, allowing extension users to use their PSs
when they are away from their desks to answer or make calls as if they were using their wired
telephones. (→ 1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
3. PS Interaction with CS
Each PS communicates with the PBX wirelessly through a cell station (CS). Each CS is connected to
the PBX and sends and receives radio waves to and from different PSs within its range, using different
channels for different PSs. Each CS has three channels, i.e., up to three calls (conversations) can be
handled simultaneously by one CS.
A PS must be within range of a CS in order to be used, however, multiple CSs can be used with the
same PBX to offer a greater area of wireless coverage. Additionally, a PS does not need to be used
with a specific CS; any PS can communicate with any CS provided the PS is registered to the PBX, and
provided the CS has at least one channel available.
Handover
If a PS is within range of more than one CS, the PS will communicate with the CS which has the greatest
signal strength and an available channel. When a PS user moves out of range of one CS and moves in
range of another CS, the PS will "hand over" its communications to the new CS. Handover is possible
when:
a) The PS is on an intercom call or on a call with an outside party. (The call will not be disconnected
during the handover.)
b) A call is ringing at the PS. (The call will continue to ring after the handover.)
c) The PS is in idle status (i.e., waiting to receive calls).
[Example of Handover]
CS-1
CS-2
Moving
CS-1
CS-2
Handover
Call is not disconnected
Feature Manual
163
1.13 P
Handover is not possible when the PS is:
a) Not within range of another CS.
b) Within range of another CS but that CS is busy.
c) Screening a call via Live Call Screening (LCS) or recording a call via Two-way Record (→ 1.19.4
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
d) Paging other extensions. (→ 1.13.1 Paging)
e) On a doorphone call.
f) Dialing digits to make a CO line call.
Conditions
•
•
If every CS that a PS is in range of is busy when that PS is called, the call will not be connected and
the caller will hear a busy tone.
A PS can only be assigned an extension number of 4 digits or less.
Installation Manual References
2.7 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.12 [1-2] Portable Station
PT Programming Manual
[690] PS Registration
[691] PS Termination
[692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration
Feature Manual References
1.6.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
1.13.12 PS Directory
Description
A portable station (PS) user can make a call or access PBX features using information stored in the PS and
PBX.
Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with your PS for available directories and usage.
Directory Type
PS Dialing Directory
164
Feature Manual
Description
A list of names and telephone numbers. Used to
make a call to one of the stored parties.
Programming
Stored in the PS by the PS
user.
1.13 P
Directory Type
Quick Dialing
Description
Programming
A list of frequently dialed feature numbers as well Stored in the PS by the PS
as names and telephone numbers. Used to quickly user.
access one of the stored features, or quickly make
a call to one of the stored parties.
System Speed Dialing A system-wide list of names and telephone
Stored in the PBX.
Directory
numbers. Used to make a call to one of the stored
parties.
PBX Extension Dialing A system-wide list of extension names. Used to
Directory
make a call to one of the stored extensions.
Stored in the PBX.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→Name
→CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name
PT Programming Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
[004] Extension Name
1.13.13 PS Feature Buttons
Description
Although a portable station (PS) does not feature as many buttons as a proprietary telephone (PT), a PS
can be customized to give a PS user access to PBX features, just as the flexible buttons on a PT can be
customized. (→ 1.6.3 Flexible Buttons)
1.13.14 PS Ring Group
Description
A PS ring group is a way for several portable stations (PSs) to be notified of an incoming call simultaneously,
while using only one channel of a cell station (CS).
Normally when a PS receives a call, one channel of a CS is used to ring the PS (→ 1.13.11 PS Connection).
If several PSs are members of an incoming call distribution (ICD) group, the available channels of a CS will
become busy just by ringing each PS. Assigning a group of PSs to a PS ring group alleviates this strain on
the CS because only one channel is needed to ring a PS ring group's members.
PS ring group members and related parameters are assigned through system programming, as explained
below.
a) Floating Extension Number: When this number is called, all PSs in the group ring.
Feature Manual
165
1.13 P
b) Group Name: Can be displayed on a ringing PS to indicate that the incoming CO line call is a
group call, and not a call directed to the PS's extension number. This is only available when
Incoming CO Line Call Information Display is set to "Called Number".
c) Incoming CO Line Call Information Display: Determines which information is shown on the PS
display when a group call is received. Select "Caller ID" to display the caller's telephone number
or name, or "Called Number" to display the name of the PS ring group which is receiving the call.
d) Member PSs: Select each PS that will be a member of the corresponding PS ring group. Note that
a PS can belong to more than one PS ring group.
[Programming Example: PS Ring Group]
Floating Extension No.
Group Name
Incoming CO Line
Information Display
PS 1
PS 2
PS 3
PS 4
PS 5
PS 6
PS 7
PS 8
PS Ring Group 1
301
Sales 1
PS Ring Group 2
302
Sales 2
PS Ring Group 3
303
Customer Service
Caller ID
Called Number
Caller ID
PS Ring Group Member
[Example of PS Ring Groups 1 and 2]
PS Ring Group 1
Floating Extension No. 301
Name: Sales 1
PS 1
Extn. 601
PS 2
Extn. 602
PS Ring Group 2
Floating Extension No. 302
Name: Sales 2
PS 3
Extn. 603
PS 4
Extn. 701
PS 5
Extn. 702
Explanation:
PS Ring Group 1
PS 1, PS 2, and PS 3 will ring simultaneously when a call is directed to floating extension number 301, and,
in the case of a CO line call, will display the Caller ID information for the call.
These PSs will ring individually when a call is directed to their assigned extension numbers (programming
not shown here).
PS Ring Group 2
PS 3, PS 4, and PS 5 will ring simultaneously when a call is directed to floating extension number 302, and,
in the case of a CO line call, will display "Sales 2".
These PSs will ring individually when a call is directed to their assigned extension numbers (programming
not shown here).
166
Feature Manual
1.13 P
ICD Groups vs. PS Ring Groups
Assigning PSs to either an ICD group or a PS ring group will allow multiple PSs to receive group calls
simultaneously. The differences between the two are highlighted below:
Features
PS Ring Group
ICD Group
Members can ring simultaneously when a call is received
Calls can be distributed to member extensions using different
methods
The CS is less likely to be busy; ringing all member PSs uses only
one CS channel
Members can log-in, log-out, and use Wrap-up time, ICD Group
button
Both PTs and PSs can belong to the same group
Each member can belong to more than one group
Calls can wait in a queue if they cannot be answered
[Example of CS Channels Used for PS Ring Group Calls and ICD Group Calls]
PS Ring Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
Incoming call
Incoming call
PS Ring Group
ICD Group
ICD Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
Explanation:
The PS ring group has four members which are in range of two different CSs. When a call arrives, each CS
uses one channel to ring all member PSs within its range.
The ICD group has one proprietary telephone (PT) member, as well as four PS members which are in range
of two different CSs. When a call arrives, each CS uses both of its channels to ring each of the member PSs
within its range.
Feature Manual
167
1.13 P
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed.
Each member of a PS ring group must be a PS, but each member does not need to be in range of the
same CS. When a call is directed to a PS ring group, all CSs connected to the PBX will try to ring
members of the group.
PS ring groups do not have Log-in or Log-out features. There is no way for a PS to log-in to or log-out
from a PS ring group.
A PS ring group may be assigned as a member of an ICD group, but the PS ring group cannot log-in
to or log-out from an ICD group. The PS ring group (and therefore its members) will always be loggedin.
When a PS is assigned to a PS ring group, the following settings are used if it receives a call directly,
but are disregarded when it receives a group call:
a) Delayed Ringing (All PSs will ring simultaneously.)
b) The incoming call display preference assigned to the PS through system programming.
c) Features set on the PS, such as Call Forwarding (FWD). Note, however, that if a PS user has set
•
•
•
•
Do Not Disturb (DND), that PS will not ring for group calls either.
When a call is directed to a PS ring group, the PBX will try to ring the group's members regardless of
whether or not they are already on another call. If all members of a PS ring group are busy when the
group is called, their PSs will not ring but the caller will hear a ringback tone.
A PS ring group will only ring one call at a time on its member PSs. If a PS ring group is ringing one
call when another call is directed to the group, the group will appear busy to the caller. If a call is directed
to a specific PS within the group in this situation and the PS is available to answer calls, the PS will ring
as usual.
If a PS in a PS ring group has set the DND feature for CO line calls, the PS will not ring for CO line calls
as well as intercom calls directed to the group.
Compatible PS
A Panasonic KX-TD7680 and KX-TD7690 can be assigned to PS ring groups.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—Distribution Method
2.9.21 [3-9] PS Ring Group
2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
PT Programming Manual
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
Feature Manual References
1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb)
1.9.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
168
Feature Manual
1.13 P
1.13.15 PT Programming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customize the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the
following programming features:
Programming
Type
Description
Example
Authorized
Programmer
Personal
Programming
Used by an extension user to
customize the extension's settings.
PT Display Language,
Call Waiting Tone, etc.
Extension user
System
Programming
Used by an authorized party to
customize the PBX.
Intercept Destination,
ARS Mode, Date and
Time, etc.
Authorized
administrator or
extension user
Manager
Programming
Used by an extension assigned as a
manager to customize the current
state of an extension, or to grant
special privileges temporarily to an
extension user.
Switching the current
time mode, Remote
Extension Dial Lock,
Remote PIN Clear, etc.
Extension assigned
as a manager
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the level of programming an extension user is
authorized to perform:
– System programming and personal programming
– Personal programming only
– No programming may be performed
The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered port on the card installed in the lowest
numbered slot can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the
extension's COS.
COS programming determines which extensions are manager extensions and can therefore perform
manager programming.
During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls.
Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is
permitted at a time, i.e., these two programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by two
users. However, personal programming can be performed simultaneously by an unlimited number of
users.
System Programming Password Level
To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. For more details, see Section
1.13.3 Password Security.
Personal Programming Data Reset
A PT user can return settings made through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment, Live
Call Screening Mode, etc.) to their default settings all at once.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Programming Mode Level
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—Password
Feature Manual
169
1.13 P
→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
→ Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
PT Programming Manual
2.1 PT Programming
[516] Programming Mode Limitation
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.11.1 Manager Features
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
3.1 Personal Programming
3.2 Manager Programming
3.3 System Programming
170
Feature Manual
1.14 Q
1.14 Q
1.14.1 Quick Dialing
Description
An extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is enabled by storing the number
(extension number, telephone number, or feature number etc.) for Quick Dialing.
Quick Dialing is convenient in situations such as the following:
– Room service calls in a hotel
– Calling your company's headquarters via the public network. Extension users can think of the
Quick Dialing number as an extension number.
[Programming Example: Quick Dialing]
Location No.
Quick Dialing No.
Desired Number
Quick Dialing 01
110
9110 (CO Line Call)
Quick Dialing 02
5
3016 (Room Service)
Quick Dialing 03
2011
90123456789 (Headquarters)
Conditions
•
Quick Dialing numbers follow the flexible numbering plan.
(→ 1.6.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.43 Quick Dialing
Feature Manual
171
1.14 Q
1.14.2 Quick Setup
Description
Basic PBX parameters can be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KXTAW848 Maintenance Console software.
When the PBX is accessed with the Installer Level Programmer Code and default password (→ 1.13.3
Password Security), for the first time (i.e., accessed after the PBX's settings have been initialized or when
the PBX's settings are still set to their default values), Quick Setup will launch automatically. From here the
following basic parameters can be programmed as desired:
Item
Parameter
Description
Date & Time Set Year/Month/Date/ The date and time set on the PC can be used by default.
Hour/Minute
System
Password for
Installer
4–10 characters
Enter the system password for installer (→ 1.13.3 Password
Security).
Operator &
Manager
Extension
Number
Assign a PBX operator. (→ 1.12.3 Operator Features) This
extension will be the operator for all time modes, and is
automatically assigned manager status to perform manager
operations. (→ 1.11.1 Manager Features)
Flexible
1.
Numbering Type
Pattern 1
(with )
Select whether or not the prefix " " must be entered before dialing
feature numbers.
[Example] Call Pickup feature number
2. Pattern 2
(without
)
Pattern 1 (with
):
41
Pattern 2 (without ): 41
Note that certain feature numbers (Line Access numbers, Operator
Call, etc.) never need this prefix.
For a list of the default flexible numbers, refer to the [Flexible
Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)] (→ 1.6.4
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering).
Extension
Number
From 101/from
201
Determines the number from which default extension numbers
begin.
Operator
0/9
The feature number for Operator Call can be selected.
Local Access
0/1/9
The feature number for Idle Line Access can be selected.
Remote
Maintenance
Number
Remote
Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX (including the
Maintenance Dial country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access
Number
the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.
Note that the programmable items may vary depending on the version of KX-TAW848 Maintenance Console
being used.
172
Feature Manual
1.15 R
1.15 R
1.15.1 Redial, Last Number
Description
Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialed, allowing the same number
to be dialed again.
Outgoing Call Log
The last five (default) dialed numbers are automatically stored at each portable station (PS). A PS user can
redial easily any of the stored numbers.
Conditions
•
•
•
Memorized telephone numbers are replaced by new ones.
Interrupt Redial
When an outside party or seized CO line is busy, a user can attempt to redial the number by pressing
the REDIAL button without going on-hook. This can be performed several times without having to go
on-hook.
It is possible to change the number of outgoing call records that can be stored at each PS through
system programming.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Redial
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.44 Redial, Last Number
1.4.2 Call Log, Incoming
1.15.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Description
It is possible to select the type of ring tone pattern that arrives at an extension for each type of incoming call,
etc.
Feature Manual
173
1.15 R
[Ring Tone Patterns]
1 280 ms
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
*: The duration of a ring tone may vary by country/area.
[Ring Tone Pattern Table]
The ring tone pattern table is categorized into three parts, each containing a specified number of pattern
plans.
The ring tone pattern table is categorized as follows:
•
Incoming CO Line Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each trunk group.
→ 2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
•
Incoming Doorphone Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each doorphone.
→ 2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
•
Others: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls as well as ring
tones assigned to certain features (e.g., timed reminder).
→ 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
The ring tone patterns that arrive at an extension are determined by the pattern plan that is assigned to that
extension through system programming.
[Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table]
Table
No.
Intercom
Call/Hold
Recall
CO Line Call/Hold
Recall
TRG1
TRG2 ...
Doorphone Call
Port 1
1
Double
Single
Single
2
Single
Double
Double
:
:
:
:
:
:
Timed
Reminder
Call Back
LCS
External
Sensor
:
:
:
:
Port 2 ...
:
:
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings— Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
PT Programming Manual
None
174
Feature Manual
1.15 R
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Manual
175
1.16 S
1.16 S
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Description
Automatically logs detailed information for each extension.
1. SMDR Output Port
The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
data to a PC, printer, etc.
2. SMDR Output Data
The following data can be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
CO line call information (incoming/outgoing)
Intercom call information (outgoing)
Log-in/Log-out information
PBX error log (→ 1.10.4 Local Alarm Information)
Hospitality feature information (→ 1.8.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES)
Printing Message information (→ 1.13.9 Printing Message)
Memory for SMDR: A specified number of records (data) can be remembered by the PBX. When
memory is full, the oldest data is overwritten by new data.
3. SMDR Format Type and Contents
The following three types of output format can be selected through system programming:
176
Feature Manual
1.16 S
Pattern A: 80-column text without call charge information
Date
Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(4)
CO Dial Number
(2) (25)
Ring Duration ACC Code
(10)
(4)
(8)
01/02/02 10:03AM
01/02/02 10:07AM
01/02/02 10:15AM
01/02/02 10:30AM
1200
1200
1200
*123
01
01
01
01
<I>12345678901234567890
<I>
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
5'15
0'05
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
1234
1234
1234
1234
01
01
01
01
<I>ABC COMPANY12345678 0'05
<I>Q COMPANY23456789
0'05
ABC COMPANY12345678
123..............
01/02/02 08:33AM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 03:35PM
01/02/02 03:45PM
01/02/02 04:00PM
01/02/02 04:01PM
01/02/02 04:01PM
01/02/02 04:05PM
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
(1)
(2)
(3)
NA
00:00'00
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05 9876543210 TR
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05
00:01'05
In the office
LOG IN
LOG OUT
EXT1235
Timed Reminder/Start
Timed Reminder/No Answer
Timed Reminder/Answer
<I>S003
(4)
CD
(3)
RC
(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ACC Code
(10)
CD
(3)
Pattern B: 80-column text with call charge information
Date
Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(4)
CO Dial Number
(2) (20)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1210 01
01/02/02 10:07AM 2005 01
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Duration Cost
(8)
(8+2)
NA
<I>
12345678901234567890 00:00'05 00560.00EU 9876543210
(5)
(7)
(10)
(8)
(9)
120-column text
Date
Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(4)
CO
(4)
Dial Number
(50)
Ring Duration Cost
(4) (8)
(8+3)
ACC Code CD
(10)
(3)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1230 0001 123456789012345678901234567890
00:00'05 00560.00EUR 9876543210 TR
01/02/02 10:07AM 1230 0001 <I>ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0'05 00:00'05
9876543210 TR
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(10)
(8)
(9)
Feature Manual
177
1.16 S
[Explanation]
The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. Each description below refers to data
indicated above by the numbers in the parentheses.
Number in
the Pattern
Data
Description
(1)
Date
Shows the date of the call.
(2)
Time
Shows the end time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM.
(3)
Ext (Extension) Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc.,
which was engaged in the call.
Also shows the following codes:
Dxxx: Outgoing CO line call from a doorphone (xxx=doorphone
number) (→ 1.4.10 Doorphone Call)
*xxx: Verified call (xxx=verification code) (→ 1.19.1 Verification
Code Entry)
(4)
CO
Shows the CO line number used for the call.
For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for CO line numbers over
hundred.
(5)
Dial Number
[CO Line Call]
Outgoing CO Line Call
Shows the dialed telephone number.
Digits shown are as follows:
0 through 9, , #
P: Pause
F: External Feature Access (EFA) signal
=: Host PBX Access code (→ 1.8.5 Host PBX Access Code
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
. (dot): Secret dialing
–: Transferred call
If the transfer destination extension enters additional digits, those
digits will be added after "–".
Incoming CO Line Call
Shows <I> + the caller's identification name/number.
[Outgoing Intercom Call]
Shows the dialed extension number followed by "EXT".
[Log-in/Log-out]
Shows the Log-in or Log-out status.
[Timed Reminder]
Shows the status of a timed reminder, either "Start", "No Answer",
or "Answer". (→ 1.17.3 Timed Reminder)
[Printing Message]
Shows the selected message. (→ 1.13.9 Printing Message)
[Sensor Call]
Shows calls from an external sensor as follows:
<I> S + sensor number. (→ 1.5.9 External Sensor)
178
Feature Manual
1.16 S
Number in
the Pattern
Data
Description
(6)
Ring
Shows the ring duration before the call was answered in minutes/
seconds.
(7)
Duration
Shows the duration of the CO line call in hours/minutes/seconds.
(8)
Acc Code
Shows the account code appended to the call. (→ 1.1.2 Account
(Account Code) Code Entry)
(9)
CD (Condition
Code)
Shows other call information using the following codes:
TR: Transfer
FW: Call Forwarding (FWD) to CO line
D0: Call using Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
RM: Remote maintenance (modem) (→ 1.13.5 PC Programming)
NA: Not answered call
RC: Received call
AN: Answered call
VR: Received call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
VA: Answered call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
(10)
Cost
Shows the call charge. This is not available if your telephone
company does not provide a call charge reporting service.
The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are
printed or displayed by SMDR
[Programmable Items]
Item
Description
Outgoing CO line call
Controls whether outgoing CO line calls are shown. This setting is
common throughout the PBX. COS programming is also required.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Outgoing Call
→ [804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing
Incoming CO line call
Controls whether incoming CO line calls are shown.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Incoming Call
→ [805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing
Outgoing intercom call
Controls whether outgoing intercom calls are recorded.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Intercom Call
Log-in/Log-out status
Controls whether the Log-in/Log-out status of extensions is
recorded.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Log-in / Logout
ARS dial
Controls whether the user-dialed number or the ARS-modified
number is shown.
The Host PBX Access code ("=" followed by the access code) can
be shown (as supplementary information) only when the modified
number is selected in this setting. (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR Options—SMDR Options—ARS
Dial
Feature Manual
179
1.16 S
Item
Description
Caller's identification
Controls whether the caller's identification number, name, number
and name, or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, <I> will not
be shown.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR Options—SMDR Options—Caller
ID Number & Name
Secret dialing
Controls the display of secret dialing, when ARS dial above, is set
to show ARS-modified numbers. If enabled, numbers dialed
secretly will be shown as dots.
If ARS dial is set to show the user-dialed numbers, secretly dialed
numbers are always shown as dots in SMDR, regardless of this
setting.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR Options—SMDR Options—Secret
Dial
Date order
Controls the date format (MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YYDD-MM)
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Format—Date Format
Received call
Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming CO line call is
shown.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR Options—SMDR Options—
Condition Code "RC/VR" Print
Answered call
Controls whether the time of answering an incoming CO line call is
shown.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR Options—SMDR Options—
Condition Code "AN/VA" Print
Timed Reminder call
Controls whether Timed Reminder calls are shown. (→ 1.17.3
Timed Reminder)
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR for External Hotel
Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Printing Message
Specifies the messages that can be selected from an extension.
(→ 1.13.9 Printing Message)
→ 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application
2—Printing Message 1–8
Time format
Controls whether time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Format—Time Format
(12H / 24H)
Conditions
•
SMDR Format
The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming in order to match the
paper size being used by the printer:
a) Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)
→ [802] SMDR Page Length
b) Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)
→ [803] SMDR Skip Perforation
The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.
180
Feature Manual
1.16 S
Explanation:
Page
Length
Skip
Perforation
Machine
Perforation
•
•
•
•
•
SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset.
If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be logged by SMDR.
The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR:
– Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation
– CO-to-CO line calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (each is logged as both an "incoming call" and
an "outgoing call")
The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period after the end of dialing before starting the SMDR timer
for outgoing CO line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialed digits to the telephone company and
this timer expires, the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone
(PT) shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged
by SMDR.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
→ [208] Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters
The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C port).
a) New Line Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically
feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF".
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—NL Code
→ [800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code
b) Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—Baud Rate
→ [800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate
c) Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—Word Length
→ [800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length
d) Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits
composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC
or printer.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—Parity Bit
→ [800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
e) Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an
•
appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
→ 2.16.1 [10-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—Stop Bit
→ [800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length
If a call is transferred to an ICD group using Automatic Transfer, the condition code "TR" will not be
recorded on SMDR (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer).
Feature Manual
181
1.16 S
•
•
•
Host PBX Access Code
The dialed number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified
number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.
When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are
not recorded on SMDR.
A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a CO line port
is connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long
distance code (e.g., “0”) is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not
require a “0” to be dialed first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get
recorded on SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognizes the telephone company as the host PBX.
Therefore, only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.
Installation Manual References
2.9.1 Connection of Peripherals
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
2.16.1 [10-1] Main
→ SMDR
→ SMDR Options
→ RS-232C—Communication—Baud Rate
→ RS-232C—Communication—NL Code
→ RS-232C—Communication—Word Length
→ RS-232C—Communication—Parity Bit
→ RS-232C—Communication—Stop Bit
PT Programming Manual
[800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length
[802] SMDR Page Length
[803] SMDR Skip Perforation
[804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing
[805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing
Feature Manual References
1.3.8 Call Transfer
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
1.8.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
182
Feature Manual
1.16 S
1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.16.2 Special Carrier Access Code
Description
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through
system programming is required every time a CO line call is made without using ARS.
A pause of a preprogrammed length will be automatically inserted between the user-dialed Special Carrier
Access code and the subsequent digits. (→ 1.13.4 Pause Insertion)
Conditions
•
•
•
TRS
Toll Restriction (TRS) checks only the dialed telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access
code. (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction))
ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits
when ARS mode is enabled. (1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX:
A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately—these
codes cannot be assigned together as one code. (→ 1.8.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to
the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code
PT Programming Manual
[303] Special Carrier Access Code
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.16.3 Speed Dialing, Personal
Description
An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialing for frequently dialed numbers which are stored
in the extension's Personal Speed Dialing.
Personal Speed Dialing is also known as Station Speed Dialing.
Feature Manual
183
1.16 S
Conditions
•
•
•
Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Speed Dialing. A name
can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialing number through personal programming, and also to
each System Speed Dialing number.
Call Directory—Speed Dialing
Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting a stored name shown on the
display.
Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialing number display to prevent the numbers from
being viewed at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock). In this case, the
Incoming/Outgoing Call Log displays and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the voice messages
in the user's message box cannot be played back. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is
required to use this feature. (→ 1.5.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number))
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
→ Personal Speed Dialing - Programming
2.10.3 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.45 Speed Dialing, Personal
1.4.2 Call Log, Incoming
1.4.1 Directories
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.3 System Programming
1.16.4 Speed Dialing, System
Description
An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialing for frequently dialed numbers which are stored
in the PBX as System Speed Dialing numbers.
Conditions
•
184
Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Speed Dialing. A name
can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialing number through personal programming, and also to
each System Speed Dialing number.
Feature Manual
1.16 S
•
•
•
Call Directory—Speed Dialing
A KX-T7737 analog proprietary telephone (APT) user can make a call by selecting a stored name
shown on the display.
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
It is possible to override Toll Restriction (TRS) when dialing a number using System Speed Dialing. (→
1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction))
System Speed Dialing Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
Pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button on a KX-T7737 while on-hook can display the System Speed
Dialing Directory.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
2.10.3 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—System Speed Dial
PT Programming Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
[509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.46 Speed Dialing, System
1.4.2 Call Log, Incoming
1.4.1 Directories
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.3 System Programming
1.16.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Description
Installing an optional Simplified Voice Message (SVM) card in the PBX allows the PBX to provide answering
machine features.
Features for an extension user with a message box:
An extension user can record a personal greeting message to greet a caller and ask him to leave a voice
message. The user can also play back and clear greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.
Feature for a caller:
A caller can leave a voice message after hearing the greeting message.
Feature Manual
185
1.16 S
Up to two SVM cards can be installed in the PBX. Each card is assigned a floating extension number
(default: 591 for SVM card 1, and 592 for SVM card 2). A card has two channels, allowing two users to
access a single card at the same time.
When an extension is assigned to an SVM card through system programming, a message box is created
for that extension. This message box is used to store greeting messages and voice messages for the
extension. Each proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT), and portable station (PS) can be
assigned its own message box.
[Example]
PBX
SVM Card 1: Floating Extension No. 591 (default)
Message Box for
Extn. 101
Message Box for
Extn. 102
Message Box for
Extn. 103
Message Box for
Extn. 210
2 CH
SVM Card 2: Floating Extension No. 592 (default)
2 CH
Message Box for
Extn. 301
Message Recording Limit
Up to 125 messages (greeting messages and voice messages for extensions) with a maximum total
recording time of 60 minutes (default) can be recorded per card. This memory is shared between the
message boxes of all extensions assigned to that card. The recording quality, which can be selected through
system programming, determines the total recording time as follows:
Recording Quality
Recording Time
High
about 40 minutes
Middle
(default)
about 60 minutes
Low
about 120 minutes
If the sum length of all recorded voice messages exceeds 90 % of total space on the SVM card, or 115 or
more voice messages have been recorded on the card, the display informs all extension users belonging to
that card that the card is almost full. Users will hear dial tone 3 when going off-hook.
Floating Extension No. and Destination
An extension user can set incoming calls to be redirected to his message box on the SVM card when he
cannot answer them. The user can set the floating extension number of the SVM card as the destination for
redirected calls. Then, the SVM card answers redirected calls, plays back the relevant greeting message,
and records a voice message. Incoming calls can be redirected to an SVM card by the following methods:
– Call Forwarding (FWD) (→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
– Intercept Routing—No Answer/Busy/DND (→ 1.9.9 Intercept Routing)
186
Feature Manual
1.16 S
[Programming Example for Intercept Routing]
Extension No.
Assigned SVM Card
No.
Intercept Destination
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
101
1
102
591
591
591
102
1
103
591
591
591
301
(Operator)
2
–
–
–
591
In this example:
If a call is received at extension 101 and cannot be answered:
a) In day mode: the call will be redirected to extension 102.
b) In lunch/break/night mode: the call will be redirected to the SVM card, and a voice message will be
recorded to the message box.
If a call is received at extension 301 (operator), the call will only be redirected to the SVM card in night mode.
If both FWD and Intercept Routing features are set for an extension, the FWD setting has priority. So, for
example, it is possible for extension 101 to temporarily set FWD settings from his extension to forward calls
to an SVM card even during day mode.
Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
When a call is redirected to the SVM card, the caller hears the designated greeting message. In addition to
the normal greeting message, an extension user can record a different greeting message for each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night) (→ 1.17.4 Time Service).
[Recording Example]
•
Normal Greeting Message: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot take your call right
now. Please leave a message."
•
Greeting Message for lunch mode: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am out for lunch right
now. Please leave a message."
If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded,
callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no greeting message has been
recorded for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message will be played instead.
If neither the normal greeting message nor the greeting message for a certain time mode have been
recorded, incoming calls will not be redirected to the SVM card in that time mode. For example, if a greeting
message has only been recorded for night mode, and no normal greeting message has been recorded,
incoming calls can only be redirected to an SVM card in night mode. No incoming calls will be redirected to
the SVM card in day/lunch/break mode.
Direct Recording
An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the message box of an extension. In this case, the
target extension will not ring. It is also possible to transfer a caller directly to the message box of an
extension.
Message Notification
If a new voice message has been left in a message box, and distinctive dial tones are enabled, the user will
hear dial tone 4 when going off-hook. If a message box contains only voice messages that have previously
been listened to, dial tone 2 is heard instead. In addition, if the user's telephone has a Message button or
Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.
Pressing the lit button while on-hook shows the caller's information.
Feature Manual
187
1.16 S
SVM Log
When a caller leaves a voice message on an SVM card, the following information is also recorded (as
available):
a.
b.
c.
d.
Caller's Name
Caller's Telephone Number
Time recording started
Voice Message Status
– "New" is displayed for voice messages which have not previously been listened to.
– "Old" is displayed for voice messages which have previously been listened to.
This information can be viewed with the display of a PT or PS.
Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was
received and the type of telephone used.
Checking Voice Messages Left by Callers
When an extension user accesses his message box, the most recent unplayed voice message is played
first. When one voice message finishes playing, the next most recent voice message will begin playing
automatically. After the last voice message in a message box has finished playing, the voice messages will
begin playing from the most recent voice message again. When all voice messages have been played this
time, the extension user will hear dial tone 4, and the line will be disconnected automatically.
SVM Remote Access from CO Line
An extension user can remotely access his message box through a CO line by calling his own extension
and using the Walking COS feature. This allows the user to, for example, check the voice messages left in
his message box when he is out of the office.
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension
An extension user can access the message box of another extension by using the Walking COS feature to,
for example, record a greeting message in a message box for an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group as
described below.
In addition, if the user's telephone has a Message button for another extension, the user can easily access
the message box of that extension and listen to the voice messages left by callers.
Message Box for Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group
When a call is redirected to an SVM card from an ICD Group using Intercept Routing—Overflow (→ 1.9.4
ICD Group Features—Overflow) or Call Forwarding (FWD), the greeting message for the first extension
assigned to that ICD Group will be played, and the voice message from the caller will be recorded in that
extension's message box.
A virtual PS can be assigned as the first extension of the ICD Group. This provides the ICD Group with a
dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension. (→ 1.19.2 Virtual PS)
Conditions
[General]
•
•
•
188
Hardware Requirement: An SVM card
The maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be recorded for
an extension can be set between 1 and 100 through system programming. (Default: 10)
The Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp will light when an incoming call is answered by the SVM
card. However, if a message is not left by the caller, the light will turn off when the call has ended.
Feature Manual
1.16 S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
It is not possible to back up the SVM Log, recorded voice messages or greeting messages. If the PBX
is initialized, all this information is cleared.
When the card to which an extension belongs is changed through system programming, all the
recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.
The voice messages for an extension will be cleared when the extension is checked out using the
Hospitality feature (→ 1.8.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES). However, greeting messages will not be
cleared.
An extension is able to receive calls even while a voice message is being recorded in that extension's
message box.
If an extension user tries to access a card that two users are already accessing, the user will hear a
busy tone.
If an extension user tries to clear a voice message shown on the display while the message box is
already in use, the extension user will hear a notification tone.
Voice message recording will stop when:
a) a caller hangs up.
b) the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (Default: 120 seconds)
c) the recording space for the SVM card reaches the limit.
•
In cases b) and c), the caller will hear a notification tone, and the line will be disconnected.
New voice messages cannot be recorded in a message box when:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
•
•
the total recording time or number of voice messages for the SVM card exceeds the limit.
the number of voice messages for an extension exceeds the limit.
the destination of a call has been changed more than once.
the desired message box is already in use by another user.
a call is received at an ICD Group, and the message box of the first extension assigned to that
group is not available, or no extension is assigned as the first member of the group.
Display Lock
A display PT user can lock the SVM Log display to prevent the user's information from being viewed
and voice messages from being played back at any extension through personal programming (Display
Lock). In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing Call Log displays and the Personal Speed Dialing number
display are also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) (→ 1.5.6 Extension PIN
(Personal Identification Number)) is required to lock/unlock the display.
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension
Listening to voice messages left by callers using a Message button for another extension is available
only when voice messages have been left in the message box.
[Recording Greeting Messages]
•
•
If an extension user tries to record a new greeting message to his message box when the card is
already full, the user will hear a reorder tone.
It is not recommended to record music when creating a greeting message.
[SVM Remote Access from CO Line]
•
Whether Walking COS is available or not can be set through system programming.
If the PBX uses analog CO lines without CPC service (→ 1.3.17 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal
Detection), it is strongly recommended to prohibit Walking COS access. If an extension user who is
accessing his message box through an analog line goes on-hook while the voice messages are being
played, the line will remain connected until all voice messages finish playing. This is because a reorder
tone cannot be detected from an analog line while playing voice messages.
Feature Manual
189
1.16 S
•
•
The first digit of the Walking COS feature number must be entered before the greeting message finishes
playing.
When accessing SVM from a CO line, it is possible to change message boxes (e.g., to leave a message
in another user's message box after listening to one's own messages). However, a user can only access
the message boxes of other extensions assigned to the same SVM card. For example, if the user
accesses a message box belonging to SVM card 1 first, then the user can only access the message
boxes of other extensions belonging to SVM card 1. If the user tries to access the message box of
another extension belonging to a different card, the user will hear a reorder tone.
While a reorder tone is heard, it is possible to retry another call by pressing " ".
Installation Manual References
2.5.4 SVM2 Card (KX-TDA5192)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.4.2 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recordings
2.4.3 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
→ SVM—Recording Time
→ SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Simplified Voice Message Access
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Display Lock / SVM Lock
2.10.7 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—SVM Lock
2.10.12 [4-2-4] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
→ Recording Mode
→ Remote Access
2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.4.3 Dial Tone
1.20.1 Walking COS
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.47 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
190
Feature Manual
1.16 S
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Feature Manual
191
1.17 T
1.17 T
1.17.1 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
Description
A ring tone is sent through an external pager (loudspeaker) when an incoming call is received. Any
extension user can answer the call.
Conditions
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager
Floating Extension Number
A floating extension number can be assigned to an external pager (default: 600). An external pager is
accessed by dialing its floating extension number.
Pager Volume
It is possible to change the volume level of an external pager through system programming.
Installation Manual References
2.9.1 Connection of Peripherals
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TAFAS Answer
2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH—Paging—EPG (External Pager)
2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager
PT Programming Manual
[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number
Operating Manual References
1.3.48 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
1.17.2 Tenant Service
Description
Tenant service is a cost-effective method of providing PBX services to different offices or companies located
in the same building, while using only one PBX.
1. Tenant Configuration
1.1. Tenant Members
Extensions are assigned to a tenant indirectly; they are assigned to extension user groups, and
these extension user groups are assigned to tenants. An extension can belong to only one
192
Feature Manual
1.17 T
extension user group and an extension user group can belong to only one tenant, therefore an
extension can belong to only one tenant. (→ 1.7.1 GROUP FEATURES)
1.2. Time Service
Time modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different
times of day (→ 1.17.4 Time Service). The start and end times of each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) for each day of the week are programmed in a Time Table. Each Time Table has a
number which corresponds to the tenant number of the tenant it serves. (Tenant 1 uses Time Table
1, etc.)
[Example of Tenant Configuration]
Tenant 1
Tenant 2
Extn. User
Group 1
Extn. User
Group 5
Extn. User
Group 2
Extn. User
Group 6
Extn. User
Group 3
Extn. User
Group 4
Uses Time Table 1
Uses Time Table 2
2. System Management
Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant.
a) Tenant Operator: Determines the destination for calls directed to the tenant's operator. If no
operator is designated, the PBX operator will serve as the tenant's operator. (→ 1.12.3
Operator Features)
→ 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)
b) ARS Mode: Determines under which circumstances Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
operates for calls made by the tenant's extensions — either when a call is made using the Idle
Line Access method, or when any CO Line Access method is used. (→ 1.3.11 CO Line
Access). The ARS mode for each tenant can also be programmed to be the same ARS mode
assigned to the entire PBX, or turned off. (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
→ 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—ARS Mode
c) Audio Source for Music on Hold: Determines the audio source for the Music on Hold heard
by the tenant's callers. Either a tone or a specific background music (BGM) number can be
used. The audio source for each tenant can also be programmed to use the same audio
source used for Music on Hold assigned to the entire PBX. (→ 1.11.4 Music on Hold)
→ 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—Music On Hold
3. Call Blocking
Through Class of Service (COS) programming, it is possible to:
1. Prevent extensions of one tenant from calling extensions of another tenant. (Tenant-to-Tenant
Call Block)
2. Limit the trunk groups which can be used by the extensions of each tenant. (External Call
Block)
3.1. Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block
Using Internal Call Block, certain features, such as making intercom calls, can be restricted based
on the COS assigned to extensions. (→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block) Well-planned COS
programming can prevent extensions of one tenant from:
Feature Manual
193
1.17 T
– Calling an extension or doorphone which belongs to another tenant
– Picking up calls ringing at extensions belonging to another tenant (→ 1.3.6 Call Pickup)
– Retrieving calls being held by another tenant (→ 1.3.2 Call Hold)
[Programming Example: Internal Call Block]
Called Party
Caller
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
Block
Block
COS 4
Block
Block
COS 5
Block
Block
Block
Block
COS 6
Block
Block
Block
Block
In this example:
Internal Call Block is employed to block calls between certain tenants.
Each extension in a tenant is assigned a COS that is not assigned to extensions which belong to
another tenant.
a) Extensions in Tenant 1 are either COS 1 or 2. They can make calls to extensions in Tenants
1, 2, and 3.
b) Extensions in Tenant 2 are either COS 3 or 4. They can make calls to extensions in Tenants
1 and 2, but not 3.
c) Extensions in Tenant 3 are either COS 5 or 6. They can make calls to other extensions in
Tenant 3 only.
Tenant 1
Tenant 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 5
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
COS 1
Extn. 108 Extn. 109
COS 2
COS 5
Tenant 2
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 6
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 110 Extn. 111
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
COS 3
COS 4
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
194
Feature Manual
COS 6
1.17 T
3.2. External Call Block
If multiple tenants are using the PBX, the External Call Block feature should be programmed to
control which COS numbers are allowed to access which trunk groups. By preventing certain COS
numbers from accessing certain trunk groups, each tenant can be given its own trunk groups which
no other tenant can access.
[Programming Example: External Call Block]
COS
Trunk
Group 1
Trunk
Group 2
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
COS 4
COS 5
COS 6
Trunk
Group 3
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 4
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 5
Block
Block
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 6
Block
Block
Block
Block
In this example:
External Call Block is employed to prevent tenants from accessing all trunk groups except the ones
designated to them. Each extension in a tenant is assigned a COS that is not assigned to
extensions which belong to another tenant.
a) Extensions in Tenant 1 are either COS 1 or 2. They can access trunk groups 1 and 2.
b) Extensions in Tenant 2 are either COS 3 or 4. They can access trunk groups 3 and 4.
c) Extensions in Tenant 3 are either COS 5 or 6. They can access trunk groups 5 and 6.
Trunk
Group 1
Trunk
Group 2
Trunk
Group 3
Trunk
Group 4
Trunk
Group 5
Trunk
Group 6
PBX
Tenant 1
Tenant 2
Tenant 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 5
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extn. 108 Extn. 109
COS 1
COS 2
Extension User
Group 2
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
COS 3
COS 4
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
COS 5
COS 6
Extension User
Group 6
Extn. 110 Extn. 111
Conditions
•
The following features used by incoming call distribution (ICD) group are determined by the tenant
number assigned to them (→ 1.9.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES):
Feature Manual
195
1.17 T
–
–
The Music on Hold heard by a caller while waiting in a queue.
The Time Table used by the ICD group to determine the current time mode. An overflow destination
and Queuing Time Table can be assigned for each time mode.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
→ PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
2.9.3 [3-2] Extension Group
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—Tenant Number
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Group
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Group
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—Tenant Number
2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor—Tenant No.
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant
2.14 [8] ARS
2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant
2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—Tenant Number
PT Programming Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[006] Operator Assignment
[320] ARS Mode
[711] Music on Hold
Feature Manual References
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.17.3 Timed Reminder
Description
An extension can be preset to ring at a certain time, to act as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can
be programmed to activate only once, or daily. If the user answers the alarm call, a prerecorded voice
message will be heard. If a message is not assigned, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard.
Timed reminders can be set in one of two ways:
•
By the extension user, from his or her own extension (Timed Reminder).
•
Remotely, by the hotel operator (Remote Wake-up Call).
196
Feature Manual
1.17 T
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time.
Only one timed reminder can be set for an extension at a time. Setting a new reminder clears the
previous reminder. If both the extension user and the hotel operator set a timed reminder for the same
extension, the timed reminder that was set most recently is effective.
Programmable Time
The Alarm Ringing time, the number of alarm repeat times, and Interval time are programmable through
system programming.
To use the voice message feature:
An MSG card is required and a message must be recorded. An extension assigned as a manager can
record messages. (→ 1.12.1 OGM (Outgoing Message)) A different message can be assigned for each
time mode (→ 1.17.4 Time Service).
Installation Manual References
2.5.3 MSG2 Card (KX-TAW84891)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
→ Timed Reminder—Interval Time
→ Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
→ Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display
2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Timed Reminder Message - Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.16.1 [10-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
None
Operating Manual References
1.3.49 Timed Reminder
1.3.56 Wake-up Call
Feature Manual
197
1.17 T
1.17.4 Time Service
Description
Time modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of
day. For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice Processing
System (VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long distance calls during lunch time,
etc.
There are four time modes—day, lunch, break, and night. The start and end times of each time mode are
programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table. Each Time Table has a number which corresponds
to the tenant it serves, i.e., Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1, etc.
1. Time Service Switching Mode
The current time mode can switch automatically to another time mode at the preprogrammed time
assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time modes manually.
Whether time modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system
programming. Each tenant is assigned a switching mode.
Time Mode
Switching
Description
Automatic
The current time mode will switch
automatically to another time mode at
the time programmed in the tenant's
Time Table, and can be switched
manually by pressing the Time Service
button or by dialing the Time Service
Switch feature number.
Manual
The current time mode will switch only
when the Time Service button is pressed
or when the Time Service Switch feature
number is dialed.
Condition
The current time mode (day/lunch/break/
night) and the switching mode
(automatic/manual) can be switched
manually by an extension assigned as a
manager, or by an extension whose
Class of Service (COS) is authorized.
2. Time Table
Each tenant has a Time Table that is used when the tenant is in Automatic Time Service Switching
mode. Each Time Table has four basic modes—day, lunch, break, and night—and also provides for
multiple "breaks", such as morning breaks and afternoon breaks, and multiple "days", such as the
morning shift and the afternoon shift following lunch.
A tenant's Time Table is programmed to control when each time mode starts (and therefore, ends) and
can be programmed separately for each day of the week.
Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to the tenant number of the tenant it serves. (Tenant
1 uses Time Table 1, etc.)
198
Feature Manual
1.17 T
[Programming Example: Time Table]
Time Table No. (Tenant No.)
Time Schedule
1
2
3
4
MON Day 1
09:00
15:00
11:00
12:00
Lunch
12:00
18:30
15:00
Day 2
13:00
19:00
18:00
Break 1 start
15:00
20:30
06:00
Break 1 end
15:15
20:45
TUE
Break 2 start
22:30
21:00
Break 2 end
22:45
21:15
Night
18:00
01:00
22:00
Day 1
09:00
15:00
11:00
06:15
[Visualization of Time Schedule for Tenant 1]
Monday
00:00
Tuesday
03:00
06:00
09:00
12:00
15:00
18:00
21:00
00:00
Time Table No. 1
Night
Day 1
Lunch Day 2 Break 1
Night
Note that in this example, the day mode (Day 2) resumes automatically when the break mode (Break
1) ends.
[Visualization of Time Schedule for Other Tenants]
Monday
00:00
Tuesday
03:00
06:00
09:00
12:00
15:00
18:00
21:00
00:00
Time Table No. 2
Time Table No. 3
Time Table No. 4
Day
Lunch
Night
Break
Note that time modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur in the
morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time modes need to be used in a tenant's time
schedule.
Also note that Tenant 4's Break 1 is followed by the night mode because no end time is programmed
for the break.
3. Features Using Time Service
The following features can be programmed separately for each time mode:
a) Destination of incoming CO line calls (Direct In Line (DIL)) (→ 1.4.5 DIL (Direct In Line))
b) Destination of calls handled by Intercept Routing (→ 1.9.9 Intercept Routing)
c) Destination of calls that are overflowed while waiting in a queue for an available agent of an
incoming call distribution (ICD) group (→ 1.9.4 ICD Group Features—Overflow)
d) Destination of incoming doorphone calls (→ 1.4.10 Doorphone Call)
Feature Manual
199
1.17 T
e) Destination of Operator Calls (→ 1.12.3 Operator Features)
f) Toll Restriction (TRS) level of each COS
g) COS numbers which are permitted/restricted to access certain trunk groups (External Call
Block) (→ 1.3.11 CO Line Access)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder (→ 1.17.3 Timed Reminder)
Queuing Time Table used by an ICD group (→ 1.9.5 ICD Group Features—Queuing)
Intercept time for Intercept Routing—No Answer (→ 1.9.9 Intercept Routing)
Intercept time for DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System
Access))
[Programming Example: DIL Table]
The DIL Table can be programmed to direct calls to a different destination for each time mode based
on the CO line receiving the call. Calls can, for example, be directed to an ICD group during the day
mode, or to the Voice Mail (VM) service of a VPS during the lunch and night modes.
DIL Destination
Port No.
(CO Line No.)
Tenant (Time
Table) No.
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
01
1
105
150
105
150
02
2
210
200
210
200
Explanation:
A call is received at 20:00 on CO line 01.
1. The call will be handled by Time Table 1.
2. The current time mode is "night" (shown in "Programming Example: Time Table", above).
3. The call is directed to extension 150, which is a floating extension number used by the VPS
(programming not shown here).
4. Holiday Mode
The PBX can also accommodate 24 different holidays. The start and end date of each holiday can be
programmed, and all holidays are assigned a single time mode. For example, if the "night" mode is
assigned as the time mode for holidays, and a holiday begins December 31st and ends January 1st, all
PBX features will use their "night" settings from 0:00 A.M. on December 31st until 0:00 A.M. on January
1st.
5. Time Service Button
A flexible button can be customized as one of the following Time Service buttons:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Day/Night button
Day/Night/Lunch button
Day/Night/Break button
Day/Night/Lunch/Break button
These buttons can be used to switch the current time mode: pressing the Day/Night button will toggle
between the day and night modes, for example.
Each Time Service button will display the current time mode using a different light pattern or color, as
shown below.
200
Feature Manual
1.17 T
Light Pattern
Current Time Mode
Off
Day
Red on
Night
Green on
Lunch
Slow green flashing
Break
Slow red flashing
Holiday
Note
Pressing a Time Service button will change the current time mode only if the COS assigned to the
extension is authorized to do so or if the extension is assigned as a manager. All other extension
users can press this button on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current time mode.
Conditions
•
•
The start times of the following time modes can be specified through PC programming as well as PT
programming.
– Day 1 and 2
– Lunch
– Night
The start and end times of the following break modes can be specified through PC programming only.
– Break 1
– Break 2
– Break 3
Note that if an end time is programmed for a break, the day mode will start or resume at this time, as
shown previously in "Visualization of Time Schedule for Tenant 1" example. If no end time is
programmed, the break will continue until the start of the next time mode, as shown in Time Table 4 in
"Visualization of Time Schedule for Other Tenants".
Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Time Service Switch
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Feature Manual
201
1.17 T
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic / Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
PT Programming Manual
[101] Time Service Switching Mode
[102] Time Service Starting Time
[514] Time Service Manual Switching
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.17.2 Tenant Service
1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.50 Time Service
2.1.5 Time Service Mode Control
1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Description
Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit extension users from making certain CO line calls, based on the Class of
Service (COS) assigned to them.
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
→ 2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
→ [602] Class of Service
Each COS is assigned a TRS level for each time mode; level 1 grants the highest level of authorization,
allowing all CO line calls to be made, and level 7 grants the lowest level of authorization, prohibiting all CO
line calls from being made. TRS levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed
Denied and Exception Code Tables, explained below.
Each COS can also have a separate TRS level applicable to calls made using System Speed Dialing.
A TRS check is applied each time a dialed number is sent to a CO line after an extension user goes off-hook
and seizes a line.
202
Feature Manual
1.17 T
[Flowchart]
An extension user tries to
make a CO line call.
Was the number dialed using
System Speed Dialing?
Yes
No
No
Is TRS Override by
System Speed Dialing enabled?
Yes
Checks the TRS level of
the extension's COS in
the current time mode.
Level 7
What is the TRS level?
Checks the TRS level of
the extension's COS for
System Speed Dialing.
Level 1
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Is the dialed number found in an
applicable Denied Code Table?
No
Yes
Is the dialed number found in an
applicable Exception Code Table?
Yes
No
The call is denied.
The user hears a reorder tone.
The call is permitted.
Denied Code Tables
Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the first few digits (leading number) of telephone
numbers which may not be called. All outgoing CO line calls made by TRS level 2 through 6 users are
compared to at least one Denied Code Table, and when the leading number of a dialed telephone number
(not including the CO Line Access number) matches an entry found in the applicable table, the call is denied.
There are five Denied Code Tables. Each table applies to a corresponding TRS level as well as the level(s)
preceding it, as explained below.
Feature Manual
203
1.17 T
Exception Code Tables
Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers which are
checked against every dialed number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a user dials a number
prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to at least one Exception Code Table. If the dialed number
matches an entry found in the applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted.
There are five Exception Code Tables. Each table applies to a corresponding TRS level as well as the
level(s) preceding it, as explained below.
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
When TRS Override by System Speed Dialing is enabled for the PBX, each COS has an additional TRS
level applicable only to calls made using System Speed Dialing.
→ 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
→ [300] TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
This allows extension users to use System Speed Dialing to make CO line calls which are normally
prohibited by the TRS level of their assigned COS. If, for example, a user's TRS level is 7, that user normally
cannot make any CO line calls. However, if the same user's TRS level for System Speed Dialing is level 1,
the user can make a CO line call to any number stored in System Speed Dialing.
TRS Level
The TRS level is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code
Tables.
As shown in the table below, the Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it,
and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.
*1:
*2:
Denied Code Tables*1
Exception Code Tables*2
Level 1
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 2
Table for Level 2
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Level 3
Tables for Levels 2 and 3
Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Level 4
Tables for Levels 2 through 4
Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Level 5
Tables for Levels 2 through 5
Tables for Levels 5 through 6
Level 6
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Table for Level 6
Level 7
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
→ 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code—Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
→ [301] TRS Denied Code
→ 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code—Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
→ [302] TRS Exception Code
[Usage Example] Using this method, certain outgoing CO line calls (e.g., international/cellular phone/long
distance) can be restricted as in the example below:
Restricted
Level 1
204
Feature Manual
Allowed
No restriction
1.17 T
Restricted
•
Allowed
International Calls
•
Level 2
(Boss)
Level 3
(Secretary)
Level 4
(Operator)
•
•
•
Countries where Clients are
Located
Cellular Phone Calls
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
•
•
International Calls
Cellular Phone Calls
•
•
•
Boss's Cellular Phone
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
•
•
•
International Calls
Cellular Phone Calls
Long Distance Calls
•
Local Calls
:
:
:
In this example, a level 1 user can make any CO line calls. A level 2 user can make international calls to the
countries where clients are located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3
user cannot make international/cellular phone calls apart from to the boss's cellular phone, but can make
long distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international/cellular phone/long distance calls, but
can make local calls.
To set TRS as in the example above, it is necessary to program the Denied Code and Exception Code
Tables as follows:
Level 1
Denied Code Tables
Exception Code Tables
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 2
011
Leading number to deny
international calls
Level 3
1123755
Leading number to deny cellular 1123755
Boss's cellular phone number
phone calls
xxxx
Level 4
1
Leading number to deny long
distance calls
:
Leading number for countries to
be allowed
011xx
—
Not required
:
:
[Programming Example: COS Settings]
TRS Level*1
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
TRS Level for System
Speed Dialing*2
1
1
1
1
6
1
2
2
2
2
6
1
COS
*1:
→ 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ [501] TRS Level
Feature Manual
205
1.17 T
*2:
→ 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
→ [509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
TRS Settings for Each Level
Through system programming, it is possible to select a different method of TRS. With this method, each
level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level.
→ 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)
Denied Code Tables*1
*1:
*2:
Exception Code Tables*2
Level 1
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 2
Table for Level 2
Table for Level 2
Level 3
Table for Level 3
Table for Level 3
Level 4
Table for Level 4
Table for Level 4
Level 5
Table for Level 5
Table for Level 5
Level 6
Table for Level 6
Table for Level 6
Level 7
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
→ 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code—Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
→ [301] TRS Denied Code
→ 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code—Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
→ [302] TRS Exception Code
[Usage Example] Using this method, it is possible to restrict certain CO line calls (e.g., international/cellular
phone/long distance) on a department basis, as follows:
Restricted
Level 1
No restriction
•
International Calls
•
•
•
•
Country where Factory is Located
Cellular Phone Calls
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
•
Cellular Phone Calls
•
•
•
•
Company Cellular Phone
International Calls
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
•
•
International Calls
Long Distance Calls
•
•
•
Cities where Clients are Located
Cellular Phone Calls
Local Calls
Level 2
(Engineering)
Level 3
(Overseas Sales)
Level 4
(Accounting)
:
Allowed
:
:
In this example, a level 1 user can make any CO line calls. A level 2 user can only make international calls
to the country where the factory is located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A
level 3 user can only make cellular phone calls to the company cellular phone, and can also make any
international/long distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international calls or most long
distance calls, but can make long distance calls to cities where clients are located, cellular phone calls and
206
Feature Manual
1.17 T
local calls.
To set TRS as in the example above, it is necessary to program the Denied Code and Exception Code
Tables as follows:
Level 1
Denied Code Tables
Exception Code Tables
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 2
011
Leading number to deny
international calls
Level 3
1123755
Leading number to deny cellular 1123755 Number for cellular phones to be
phone calls
xxxx
allowed
011
Level 4
1
:
Leading number to deny
international and long distance
calls
:
011xx
Leading number for country to be
allowed
1315
Long distance numbers for
states/cities to be allowed, and
1530
leading number of cellular
1123755 phones
:
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into
service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they
are established will restrict the customer and the users of the PBX from gaining access to the
network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
TRS checks are performed for all calls made by:
– Any CO line access (Idle Line Access, Trunk Group Access, S-CO Line Access)
– Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
•
The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain non-digits ( or
#). By default, the PBX ignores ("No Check") any non-digits that are dialed, which is useful in preventing
unauthorized calls which could possibly be made using certain telephone company exchanges.
→ 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Check for dial "* #"
TRS can also be programmed to check digits that are dialed after External Feature Access, such as
when trying to transfer a call to an outside party. (→ 1.5.1 EFA (External Feature Access))
→ 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA
Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code
TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialed using a Host PBX Access code (→ 1.8.5
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Special Carrier
Access code (→ 1.16.2 Special Carrier Access Code).
•
•
Feature Manual
207
1.17 T
Access Code is stored in the PBX
Access Code Type
Access Code is not
dialed
Access Code is dialed
•
•
•
•
Host PBX Access
Code
TRS ignores the code
and checks the
remaining digits.
Number dialed is not a
CO line call, so TRS
does not check the
number.
TRS checks the entire
number.
Special Carrier
Access Code
TRS ignores the code
and checks the
remaining digits.
TRS checks the entire
number.
TRS checks the entire
number.
ARS
If ARS is applied to a dialed number, TRS will check the user-dialed number, not the modified number
produced by ARS. You do not need to program ARS-modified numbers in any of the TRS Tables.
Additionally, when using ARS, TRS will ignore the Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access
code.
Dialing Digit Restriction during Conversation
TRS can also limit the number of digits which may be dialed by an extension user while the user is
engaged on a received CO line call. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the limit, the line will be
disconnected.
→ 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
It is possible to select through system programming whether the CO line is disconnected when the
Inter-digit time expires without the TRS check being completed.
→ 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check
– If no disconnection is chosen, the TRS check will also be performed after the Inter-digit time
expires.
– If disconnection is chosen, the line will be disconnected when the CO line Inter-digit time expires.
This also prevents EFA from being used.
This setting applies to all CO lines.
When one of the following features is used, the TRS level of the extension can be temporarily changed.
If two or more of these features are used simultaneously (Dial Tone Transfer is used while the extension
is locked, for example), the TRS level of the feature with the highest priority is applied for the duration
of the call. The numbers below (1 through 4) indicate the priority of each feature, with 1 having the
highest priority, and 4 having the lowest.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Dial Tone Transfer (→ 1.4.4 Dial Tone Transfer)
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
Verification Code Entry/Walking COS (→ 1.19.1 Verification Code Entry, → 1.20.1 Walking COS)
Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
→ TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
208
Access Code is not
stored in the PBX
Feature Manual
1.17 T
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code
2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code
2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code
2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
PT Programming Manual
[300] TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
[301] TRS Denied Code
[302] TRS Exception Code
[501] TRS Level
[509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
[602] Class of Service
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
1.3.11 CO Line Access
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.16.4 Speed Dialing, System
1.17.4 Time Service
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Manual
209
1.18 U
1.18 U
1.18.1 Upgrading the Software
Description
It is possible to upload software from a PC to the PBX to upgrade the following:
Data File
Storing Area
Main Processing (MPR) software data
Operating system data area on the Main Board of the KXTAW848.
Default system programming data for each
country/area
Country/area data area on the Main Board.
Language data for PT display
Each language data area on the Main Board.
There are two types:
Type 1: Proprietary Telephone (PT) display except for PT
system programming (→ 1.13.15 PT Programming) (five
languages max.)
Type 2: PT system programming data (one language max.)
Cell Station (CS) software data
Flash ROM on the CS.
Conditions
•
The software version of the Main Board can be confirmed through system programming.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
None
PT Programming Manual
[190] Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference
210
Feature Manual
1.19 V
1.19 V
1.19.1 Verification Code Entry
Description
An extension user can enter a verification code when calling from his own or any other extension, to change
the Toll Restriction (TRS) level (→ 1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)) or to identify the call for accounting and
billing purposes. A verification code personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature.
Conditions
WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such
calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent
use, we strongly recommend:
a) Keeping PINs secret.
b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c) Changing PINs regularly.
•
When a CO line call is made using Verification Code Entry:
– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (→ 1.3.16 COS (Class of Service))
– the Itemized Billing code of the specified extension is applied (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
–
•
•
•
*1:
+ verification code is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension number
of the actual extension used (→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)).
Verification Code Entry through DISA
This feature is also available through DISA. (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
Verification Code PIN
A verification code PIN must be assigned for each verification code through system programming or
through manager programming.
Verification Code PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a
preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN for the verification code will be locked. Only an
extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
[Example of Verification Codes and Their Programming]
Location
Code*1
Name*2
PIN*3
COS*4
Itemized Billing
Code for ARS*5
0001
1111
Tom Smith
1234
1
2323
0002
2222
John White
9876543210
3
4545
:
:
:
:
:
:
→ 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Verification Code
→ [120] Verification Code
Feature Manual
211
1.19 V
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5
→ 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—User Name
→ [121] Verification Code Name
→ 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Verification Code PIN
→ [122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)
→ 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—COS Number
→ [123] Verification Code COS Number
→ 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Itemized Billing Code for ARS
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification
Code
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemized Code
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemized Code
2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code
PT Programming Manual
[120] Verification Code
[121] Verification Code Name
[122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)
[123] Verification Code COS Number
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.11.1 Manager Features
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.51 Verification Code Entry
3.2.2 Manager Programming
1.19.2 Virtual PS
Description
An extension number can be assigned for a portable station (PS) without registering the PS unit itself. This
is known as temporary registration. If a forward destination is then assigned for this PS, all calls to that
extension number will be forwarded to the assigned destination.
The following features use this method:
212
Feature Manual
1.19 V
Feature
Automatic Fax Transfer
Description & Reference
A virtual PS can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine.
→ 1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer
Simplified Voice Message
Registering a virtual PS as the first extension of an ICD Group
provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not
shared with an actual extension.
→ 1.16.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.12 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
PT Programming Manual
[690] PS Registration
Feature Manual References
1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Description
A VPS can be connected to extension ports of the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM
group. This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls
and incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a
message or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension
and leave notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls.
1. VM Group Type
Type
Description
VM (DTMF) Group
A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration
features.
A maximum of 2 groups can be assigned.
VM (DPT) Group
A group of APT or hybrid ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration features.
One VM (DPT) group can be assigned. A maximum of 4 ports (eight
channels) of the VPS can form a group.
Feature Manual
213
1.19 V
[Example]
PBX
Hybrid
Port
VM (DPT) Group
Floating extn. no. 500
VM (DTMF) Group
Floating extn. no. 200
Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104
Extn.201 Extn.202 Extn.203 Extn.204
Hybrid
Port
Hybrid
Port
Hybrid
Port
Hybrid
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
VPS
(DTMF Integration)
VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration)
VM (DTMF) Group Assignment:
The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX. These SLT ports, as well as VM (DTMF) Group
settings, must be configured to allow DTMF Integration, as shown in the following [Programming
Example of Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group].
VM (DPT) Group Assignment:
The VPS is connected to the APT or hybrid ports of the PBX. These ports, as well as VM (DPT) group
settings, must be configured to allow DPT (Digital) Integration, as shown in the following [Programming
Example of Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group].
[Programming Example of Extension Port]
Slot
*1:
*2:
214
Port Port Type Extn. No.
PT Property
Port No.
Type*1
of VPS*2
VM (DPT)
1
VM (DPT)
2
1
1
1
2
S-Hybrid
S-Hybrid
101
102
4
4
1
2
SLT
SLT
201
202
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
5
5
1
2
SLT
SLT
301
302
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) Group 1
VM (DTMF) Group 2
→ 2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—Type (for Hybrid port)
→ [601] Terminal Device Assignment
→ 2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—VM Port No. (for Hybrid port)
Feature Manual
1.19 V
[Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group]
VM (DTMF)
Group No.
Floating
Extension
No.
Group
Name
Service
Mode
1
2
200
300
Company B
Company C
AA
VM
Extension No. of
Port Connected to
VPS Port
1
2
3
201
202
203
301
302
303
→ 2.9.19 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
[Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group]
Floating Extension No.*1
500
*1:
*2:
Group Name*2
Company A
→ 2.9.16 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Floating Extension No.
→ [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
→ 2.9.16 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Group Name
2. Incoming Calls to VM Group
When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt
starting at the lowest VM port number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings (→ 1.4.8 DND (Do Not
Disturb), → 1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)) for each extension port are disregarded.
It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through
system programming. If the queuing is disabled through system programming, the call will be redirected
to the destination, assigned on the trunk group which receives the call, by the Intercept Routing feature.
Conditions
•
•
•
It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly
to the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g., FWD, Idle Extension Hunting)
on the extension in the group.
The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the
extension.
One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access
It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialing button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature. (→ 1.12.2
One-touch Dialing) For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123) of the VPS (extension
number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialing button. When pressing this button, the
outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard.
All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to either the same HLC or PLC card, or to the preinstalled hybrid ports.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
→ DPT Type—Type (for Hybrid port)
→ DPT Type—VM Unit No. (for Hybrid port)
→ DPT Type—VM Port No. (for Hybrid port)
2.9.15 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Feature Manual
215
1.19 V
2.9.16 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
2.9.19 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
PT Programming Manual
[601] Terminal Device Assignment
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
1.19.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Description
A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this
PBX in a tightly integrated fashion.
DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through APT or hybrid ports of
the PBX.
Feature Explanation
1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup
The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming
call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically.
2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. (→ 1.6.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding)) The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS. Therefore the
caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.
3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted CO line calls will be redirected
to the VPS. (→ 1.9.9 Intercept Routing) If the "Intercept to Mailbox" setting is enabled through
system programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS.
Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox
number.
→ 2.9.15 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings—Intercept to Mailbox
4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in
the mailbox of the desired extension. (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer) The extension user should use the Voice
Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user
presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM
group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after
the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox
number.
5. Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS
If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS and the call
is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the PBX sends the mailbox number of
216
Feature Manual
1.19 V
the transfer destination extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox
of the extension without knowing the mailbox number. The "Transfer Recall to Mailbox" setting
should be enabled through system programming to use this feature.
→ 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—Transfer Recall
→ 2.9.15 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings—Transfer Recall to Mailbox
→ [201] Transfer Recall Time
6. Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access)
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the
Message button light on the corresponding telephone as notification. (→ 1.11.3 Message Waiting)
Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the
Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages
stored in his mailbox without dialing such as a mailbox.
When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating
extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the messages stored in
his mailbox without dialing his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox Access). It is possible to disable this
feature by COS programming on the VPS.
7. VPS CO Line Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call*
Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the
destination of the incoming CO line call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the VPS trunk group
number and time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant (→ 1.17.4 Time Service) assigned for the
call to the VPS. Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message (company greeting) to the caller.
Corresponding VPS trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of each CO
line port.
2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
→Tenant Number
→VM Trunk Group
Feature Manual
217
1.19 V
[Example]
Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.
[DIL Programming Example]
DIL Destination
Tenant No.
Night
VPS Trunk
Group No.
105
100
1
1
100
102
100
2
2
:
:
:
:
:
Port No.
(CO Line No.)
Day
Lunch
Break
01
105
100
02
102
:
:
[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]
Trunk Group No.
1
2
:
Company Greeting No.
Incoming Call Service
··
Day
1
Custom Service 11
··
Lunch
2
Custom Service 29
··
Break
3
Custom Service 31
··
Night
4
Custom Service 12
··
Day
5
Custom Service 21
··
Lunch
6
Custom Service 15
··
Break
7
Custom Service 42
··
Night
8
Custom Service 30
··
:
:
:
··
Explanation:
A CO line call handled by DIL distribution reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing
feature. According to the [DIL Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming
Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.
Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DIL destination and
company greeting number.
218
Feature Manual
1.19 V
CO Line Call
Received on
CO line 01
CO Line Call
Sends the following information:
· VPS Trunk Group: 1
· Time mode: Day
Received on
CO line 02
PBX
Intercept
Sends the following information:
· VPS Trunk Group: 2
· Time mode: Lunch
Tenant 1
Tenant 2
(Company A)
(Company B)
VPS
(Floating Extn. No. 500)
Extn. 105
Extn. 102
8. Caller's Identification Notification to the VPS
When receiving a CO line call, the PBX sends the caller's identification number/name to the VPS.
9. Status Notification to the VPS
After the call is redirected by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension (e.g., busy)
to the VPS.
10. Paging by the VPS
The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message. (→ 1.13.1 Paging)
11. Live Call Screening (LCS)
A PT or PS user can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer
the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring
can be carried out in two ways: each PT user can choose which through personal programming (Live
Call Screening Mode Set). PS users cannot choose the way: only Private mode is available for them.
Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear a warning tone. To monitor the call, the user goes off-hook with the
handset, MONITOR button, or SP-PHONE button. However, PS users cannot monitor the call with the
speakerphone.
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Answer Mode
12. Two-way Recording into the VPS
A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the
phone.
The Two-way Record button is used to record into one's own mailbox. The Two-way Transfer button is
used to record into someone else's mailbox.
Note
Before recording a Two-way telephone conversation, you should inform the other party that the
conversation will be recorded.
Feature Manual
219
1.19 V
13. VPS Data Control by the PBX*
The date and time settings of the VPS are controlled by the PBX.
14. Remote FWD Setting by the VM*
Extension FWD settings can be programmed using the VPS.
*: This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS.
Conditions
[General]
•
•
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension
number of the VM group as the parameter.
Note that when a user transfers a call to the VPS with the VM Transfer button, any caller ID information
associated with the original call is not passed to the VPS.
Extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 2
to 4 digits.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]
•
•
•
•
•
If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT, and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode, both the
PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status. The SLT will ring to indicate a message is
being recorded. The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off-hook. To intercept the call, press
Flash/Recall button or flash the hookswitch. (→ 1.13.2 Paralleled Telephone)
LCS Button
A flexible button can be customized as the LCS button.
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
To prevent unauthorized monitoring, it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN. This
PIN will be required when setting LCS. (→ 1.5.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)) If the
user forgets the PIN, it can be cleared by an extension assigned as the manager.
Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation
after the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set [After Answering]).
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Recording Mode
→ 2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Recording Mode
To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, LCS can only be turned on or off from
the wired telephone. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, setting LCS on/off from the PS has no effect. (→
1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
[Two-way Recording into the VPS]
•
•
Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An
extension number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch
record button for the mailbox of the specified extension. (One-touch Two-way Transfer Button).
When all of the VPS ports are busy:
a) Pressing the Two-way Record button sends a warning tone
b) Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends a warning tone.
220
Feature Manual
1.19 V
[Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS]
•
When transferring a CO line call to a mailbox of the VPS, users should use the VM Transfer button.
If using a standard Transfer button, users must dial "#6" after accessing the VPS, and confirm that the
desired mailbox has been reached, before going on hook to complete the transfer.
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—Transfer Recall
2.9.15 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
2.9.16 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
→ LCS Recording Mode
→ LCS Answer Mode
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Recording Mode
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Ext. No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—VM Trunk Group Number
2.15.2 [9-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
→ Tenant Number
→ VM Trunk Group
PT Programming Manual
[201] Transfer Recall Time
Feature Manual References
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.6.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Feature Manual
221
1.19 V
Operating Manual References
1.3.53 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening)
1.3.54 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record
1.3.55 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.2.2 Manager Programming
1.19.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Description
The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other.
The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering
service between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform
the extension status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT.
The following answering services and features are available:
1. Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode
When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a
specified mailbox.
[Example]
The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox
number of the person you wish to leave your message for."
↓
The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialed number is sent to the VPS via the PBX.
↓
The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike's voice mail. I am sorry I
cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back."
↓
The caller leaves a message.
If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM
(DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the
mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS
automatically using the caller-dialed number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox
without knowing the mailbox number.
[Available Features for Follow on ID]
a)
b)
c)
d)
FWD to a Mailbox
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox
Call Transfer to a Mailbox
Listening to a Message in a Mailbox
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode
The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance.
222
Feature Manual
1.19 V
3. VM → AA Service, AA → VM Service
It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service
or vice versa.
System Explanation
1. Service Mode Assignment
Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to correspond with the
assignment of the VPS.
→ 2.9.19 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Type
2. DTMF Command Assignment
Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings.
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
→ VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
→ VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
→ VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
→ VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Command (Default)
Switching to VM
#6
Switching to AA
#8
Recording message
H
Listening message
H
Note
H = Mailbox Number
3. VM Service
a) FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is
forwarded from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called
extension without knowing the mailbox number.
[FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection]
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are
forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be
performed by selecting "AA" through system programming.
→ 2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Transmitted Command
Parameter
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Answer by Mailbox
(Default)
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command (H
Recording message command (#6 [H = Mailbox No.])
+ H [H = Mailbox No.])
AA
Switching to AA command (#8)
None
(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
Switching to AA command (#8)
Feature Manual
223
1.19 V
b) Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a CO line call
is intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the
called extension without knowing the mailbox number.
[Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection]
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted CO line calls will be
redirected to the VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are
intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be
performed by selecting "AA" through system programming.
→ 2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS
Sequence
Transmitted Command
Parameter
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Answer by Mailbox
Recording message command (H
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command (#6 [H = Mailbox No.])
+ H [H = Mailbox No.])
AA
Switching to AA command (#8)
None (Default)
(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
Switching to AA command (#8)
[Example of a) & b)]
CO Line Call
Sent "#6" + "102".
PBX
mailbox number
Switching to VM command
FWD, Intercept
Transfer
VPS (In AA service mode)
Operator
Extn. 102
VM Port 1
VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X
VM Port 3
c) Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message
in the mailbox of the desired extension. (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer) The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the
extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer
the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required
command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without
knowing the mailbox number.
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
224
Feature Manual
1.19 V
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
[Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number]
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Switching to VM command + Recording
message command (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command (H [H = Mailbox
No.])
[Example]
CO Line Call
Sent "#6" + "103".
PBX
mailbox number
Switching to VM command
Transfer with VM Transfer
button + extension number (103)
Extension
(Operator)
VPS (In AA service mode)
VM Port 1
VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X
VM Port 3
d) Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature on the corresponding
telephone to notify the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. The Message
button light of the extension will turn on (→ 1.11.3 Message Waiting), thereby notifying the
extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns
on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox
without dialing such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels
the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the Message button light).
→ 2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is canceled after the extension user has
accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the Message Waiting feature is canceled after the
extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox.
[Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button]
Feature Manual
225
1.19 V
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Switching to VM command + Listening message Listening message command ( H [H = Mailbox
command
No.])
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
[Example]
PBX
Pressing the
MESSAGE
button
Extn. 102
Sent "#6" + " ", "102".
Listening message
command, mailbox number
Switching to VM command
VPS (In AA
service mode)
Mailbox for
Extn. 102
4. AA Service
If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called
destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the
extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone).
Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings.
[DTMF Status Signals and Conditions]
Status
226
Condition
Default
Command
RBT (ringback tone)
The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension.
1
BT (busy tone)
The called extension is busy.
2
ROT (reorder tone)
The dialed number is invalid.
3
DND (DND tone)
The called extension has set DND. (→ 1.4.8 DND (Do
Not Disturb))
4
Answer
The called extension has answered the call.
5
FWD VM RBT (FWD to
Voice Mail ringback tone)
The called extension has set FWD to VPS and the
PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
6
FWD VM BT (FWD to
Voice Mail busy tone)
The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all
ports of the VPS are busy.
7
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to
extension ringback tone)
The PBX is calling an extension other than the one
dialed. FWD or Idle Extension Hunting (→ 1.9.7 Idle
Extension Hunting) may be assigned by the called
extension.
8
Feature Manual
1.19 V
Status
Condition
Default
Command
Confirm (confirmation
tone)
The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has
been successfully set or canceled (e.g., Message
Waiting) on the extension.
9
Disconnect
The caller has hung up.
#9
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—DND tone
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
→ VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
[Example]
1
An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS greets
the caller: "Thank you for calling Panasonic. If you
know the extension number of the person you wish…
".
2
The caller dials the extension number (extn. 102).
The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the
PBX.
3
If the extension is not available, the PBX sends
DTMF status signal of the extension (busy status) to
the VPS.
4
The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send
the appropriate message to the caller: "Sorry. The
extension is busy. Would you like to leave a
message… ".
1
PBX
2
Transfer
3
Sent "2".
Busy
Status
Busy
Extn.
102
4
VPS
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension
number of the VM group as the parameter.
It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the
Follow on ID to the VPS.
→ 2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow
on ID
It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service
to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS.
→ 2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Timing—DTMF Length for VM
It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox
number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox
Access ID).
→ 2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—Programmed
Feature Manual
227
1.19 V
•
•
Mailbox No.
→ 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
→ 2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable.
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
→ Timing—Inter-digit Time
→ Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper
recording. (→ 1.4.1 Data Line Security)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
2.9.9 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—Programmed Mailbox No.
2.9.18 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
2.9.19 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
2.10.4 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
2.10.10 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
PT Programming Manual
None
Feature Manual References
1.3.8 Call Transfer
1.6.3 Flexible Buttons
1.6.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
1.9.9 Intercept Routing
1.19.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Operating Manual References
1.3.55 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
228
Feature Manual
1.20 W
1.20 W
1.20.1 Walking COS
Description
A user can enter his extension number and extension personal identification number (PIN) (→ 1.5.6
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)) at another extension, to make the following types of call
using his Class of Service, including TRS level, overriding the other extension's Class of Service.
•
CO line call
•
Intercom call
•
External Relay Control (→ 1.5.8 External Relay)
After performing Walking COS, the following features are also available for the specified extension:
•
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (→ 1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb), → 1.6.6
FWD (Call Forwarding))
•
Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (→ 1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
•
Absent Message setting (→ 1.1.1 Absent Message)
•
Extension Dial Lock (→ 1.5.4 Extension Dial Lock)
•
Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (day/lunch/break/night) (→ 1.17.4 Time Service)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
When a CO line call is made using Walking COS:
– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (→ 1.3.16 COS (Class of Service))
– the Itemized Billing code of the specified extension is applied (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
– the specified extension number is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the
extension number of the actual extension used (→ 1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording)).
Walking COS is also available through DISA. (→ 1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
Extension PIN
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (→ 1.5.6 Extension
PIN (Personal Identification Number)) If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be
disconnected.
This feature can not be used for extensions which the extension being operated is prevented from
calling by Internal Call Block. (→ 1.9.12 Internal Call Block)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification
Code
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Remote Operation by Other
Extension
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
2.10.8 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
PT Programming Manual
Feature Manual
229
1.20 W
[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Operating Manual References
1.3.57 Walking COS
1.20.2 Walking Extension
Description
It is possible for an extension user to trade extension settings with another extension.
When Walking Extension is executed, all extension settings (extension number, Class of Service (COS),
One-touch Dialing memory, etc.) of the "old" extension are exchanged with the "new" extension.
This feature is useful when an extension user moves desks, or when an extension user has no permanent
desk.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
This feature allows extension settings to be switched between PTs and SLTs. Moving between tenants
is also possible.
Incoming calls to your extension will reach you at your new location.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (→ 1.5.6 Extension
PIN (Personal Identification Number))
If a DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after the
Walking Extension has been performed, the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the
paired extension through system programming.
If the Walking Extension feature is performed at the same time that the target extension is being
programmed by PC, the Walking Extension feature may not work properly. (→ 1.13.5 PC Programming)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
2.10.13 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Pair Extension
PT Programming Manual
[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone
Operating Manual References
1.3.58 Walking Extension
230
Feature Manual
1.20 W
1.20.3 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Description
A portable station (PS) can be used in parallel with a wired telephone, i.e., an analog proprietary telephone
(APT), or single line telephone (SLT), allowing an extension user to make or receive calls with either the
wired telephone or the PS. The PS will use the same extension number as the wired telephone, and many
of the wired telephone's extension settings (Call Forwarding [FWD], Class of Service [COS], etc.) are also
used by the PS.
In order to use a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel mode, the mode must be turned on using the PS.
[Example of Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, Parallel Mode]
PBX
Hybrid Port
APT
Wireless Phone
(or any SLT)
Hybrid
Port
Cell Station
Extension Port
Wired Telephone
(APT, SLT)
Parallel Mode
Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode
Extn. 102
Extn. 103
PS
Conditions
•
•
•
Whether or not a PS is allowed to pair itself with a wired telephone is determined by the COS assigned
to the extension number of the wired telephone.
Wireless XDP Parallel mode can be turned on or off using the PS only.
To switch between the wired telephone and the PS during a conversation, simply go off-hook with the
other telephone. Alternatively, to seize a separate line, use another method, such as pressing a CO or
INTERCOM button.
In addition, going off-hook with the other telephone seizes a separate line when the extension is:
a) Engaged in a conference call. (→ 1.3.13 Conference, → 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override, → 1.13.10
Privacy Release)
b) Screening a call using Live Call Screening (LCS) or when recording a conversation using Two-way
Record. (→ 1.19.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
c) Being monitored by another extension. (→ 1.3.4 Call Monitor)
d) When the extension has a call on consultation hold. (→ 1.3.15 Consultation Hold)
•
•
When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel mode is on a call, other extension users cannot perform Executive
Busy Override when they call this extension. (→ 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override)
When a PS is paired with a wired telephone, most of the extension settings assigned to the wired
telephone (extension number, extension name, etc.) will be used by the PS, and the PS will use its own
extension settings once again when Wireless XDP Parallel mode is canceled. Note, however, that the
Feature Manual
231
1.20 W
•
•
•
following extension settings of the wired telephone are copied to the extension settings of the PS when
Wireless XDP Parallel mode is activated, and will remain in effect for the PS after the mode is canceled.
– Call Waiting Setting (→ 1.3.9 Call Waiting Tone)
– FWD/Do Not Disturb (DND) Setting (→ 1.4.8 DND (Do Not Disturb), → 1.6.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding))
– Call Pickup Deny Setting (→ 1.3.6 Call Pickup)
– Executive Busy Override Deny Setting (→ 1.5.3 Executive Busy Override)
– Itemized Billing Code for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (→ 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
– Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) (→ 1.5.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number))
– COS Programming (→ 1.3.16 COS (Class of Service))
– Extension User Group (→ 1.7.1 GROUP FEATURES)
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (→ 1.3.5 Call Park, → 1.3.8 Call
Transfer)
The PS will retain its original settings for the following items even when in Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
These settings can be set on the wired telephone and PS independently, and the settings can be
different.
– Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection (→ 1.15.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming (→ 1.10.2 Line Preference—Incoming)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing (→ 1.10.3 Line Preference—Outgoing)
– Hot Line Setting (→ 1.8.6 Hot Line)
– Display Language (→ 1.4.7 Display Information)
– Flexible Button Assignment (→ 1.6.3 Flexible Buttons)
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (The setting assigned to the wired
telephone will first be copied to the PS's extension settings, then can be changed for the PS if
necessary.) (→ 1.3.5 Call Park, → 1.3.8 Call Transfer)
If an extension number is required when changing any PS settings while in Wireless XDP Parallel
mode, use the original extension number assigned to the PS, not the extension number of the paired
(wired) telephone.
If the Extension Feature Clear is performed, the corresponding extension data for both the wired
telephone and the PS will be cleared. (→ 1.5.5 Extension Feature Clear)
When a call arrives, both the wired telephone and the PS will ring. However, when one of the following
settings is made, only the telephone which was used to make the setting will ring.
– Automatic Callback Busy (→ 1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on))
– Transfer Recall (→ 1.3.8 Call Transfer)
– Hold Recall (→ 1.3.2 Call Hold)
– Call Park Recall (→ 1.3.5 Call Park)
Programming References
PC Programming Manual
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—Type (for Hybrid port)
2.7.12 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Set by PS
232
Feature Manual
1.20 W
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Wireless XDP
PT Programming Manual
[515] Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone
Feature Manual References
1.3.16 COS (Class of Service)
1.13.2 Paralleled Telephone
Operating Manual References
1.3.59 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Feature Manual
233
1.20 W
234
Feature Manual
Section
2
Appendix
Feature Manual
235
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
2.1
Capacity of System Resources
System
Item
Capacity
Absent Message—Extension
1 x 16 characters
Absent Message—System
8 x 16 characters
Call Park Zone
Conference
100
3-8 parties per conference (32 parties total)
COS
64
Extension number
Extension Personal Identification
Number (PIN)
Host PBX Access Code
1-5 digits (2-4 digits for extensions which have a VM [DPT] mailbox)
10 digits, 1 entry/extension
10 digits, 10 entries/trunk group
Number of Characters of Name
20
Printing message
8
Queuing Time Table
64
Ring Tone Pattern Plan
8
Simultaneous Programmers
Unlimited
SMDR Call Storage
200 calls
Special Carrier Access Code
16 digits, 20 entries
Tenant
8
Time Service Holiday
24
Verification Code
4 digits, 1000 entries
Verification Code Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
10 digits, 1000 entries
Dialing
Item
Emergency Call
Hot Line
Personal Speed Dialing
Quick Dialing
Redial
System Speed Dialing
236
Feature Manual
Capacity
32 digits, 10 entries
32 digits
32 digits, 10 entries/extn.
4 digits, 80 entries
32 digits
32 digits, 1000 entries
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Groups
Item
Call Pickup Group
Capacity
64
Idle Extension Hunting Group
64 (16 extensions/group)
Incoming Call Distribution Group
128 (32 extensions/group)
Paging Group
32
PS Ring Group
32
Trunk Group
64
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) Group
1 group x 4 ports (8 channels)
2 groups x 24 channels
TRS
Item
TRS Level
Capacity
7
TRS Denied Code
16 digits, 100 entries/level
TRS Exception Code
16 digits, 100 entries/level
ARS
Item
Capacity
Routing Plan Table
16 entries
Leading Number Table
16 digits, 1000 entries
Leading Number Exception Table
16 digits, 200 entries
ARS Carrier
10
Itemized Billing Code
10 digits
Authorization Code
10 digits
Call Log and Message Waiting
Item
Capacity
Outgoing Call Log—PS
100 records/extn.
140 records/system
Incoming Call Log—PT
100 records/extn.
480 records/system
Incoming Call Log—PS +
Incoming Call Distribution Group
100 records/extn. or group
Total 2048 records/system
Message Waiting—PS + Incoming
Call Distribution Group
256
Feature Manual
237
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Item
Capacity
Message Waiting—PT + SLT
256
Voice Message
Item
Capacity
Outgoing Message (OGM)
32
OGM Total Recording Time
8 minutes
Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Total Recording Time
125 messages/card
40, 60, or 120 minutes (depending on the recording quality)
Hospitality and Charge Management Features
Item
Capacity
Hotel Operator
4
Password
Item
Capacity
System Password for Installer
4 – 10 characters
System Password for Administrator—for PC
Programming
4 – 10 characters
System Password for User—for PC
Programming
4 – 10 characters
System Password for Administrator—for PT
Programming
4 – 10 digits
System Password for User—for PT
Programming
4 – 10 digits
Manager Password
4 – 10 digits
Programmer Code
Item
Capacity
Installer Level Programmer Code
4 – 16 characters
Administrator Level Programmer Code
4 – 16 characters
User Level Programmer Code
0 – 16 characters
238
Feature Manual
2.2 Tones/Ring Tones
2.2
Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns (Default)
1s
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Confirmation Tone 5
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
DND Tone
CO Line Call Limit
Warning Tone
Feature Manual
239
2.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns (Default)
15 s
Hold Alarm Tone
Call Waiting Tone 1
1s
Call Waiting Tone 2
OR
Ring Tone Patterns (Default)*
1s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
240
Feature Manual
2.3 Revision History
2.3
Revision History
2.3.1
PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxx
Changed Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.3.2
1.3.6 Call Pickup
[Directed Call Pickup]
1.3.9 Call Waiting Tone
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.13.1 Paging
Paging Group
1.13.11 PS Connection
Handover
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
CD (Condition Code)
1.17.4 Time Service
Features Using Time Service
PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx
New Contents
•
1.5.8 External Relay
•
1.5.9 External Sensor
•
1.8.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES
•
1.11.1 Manager Features
Changed Contents
•
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
•
1.6.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
•
1.15.1 Redial, Last Number
•
1.16.1 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
•
1.17.3 Timed Reminder
Feature Manual
241
2.3 Revision History
•
2.3.3
1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)
PSMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx
New Contents
•
1.16.5 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
•
1.19.2 Virtual PS
Changed Contents
•
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
•
1.3.13 Conference
•
1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
End of Call Detection
•
1.6.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
•
1.6.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
•
1.9.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
ICD Group button
•
1.9.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Wrap-up Timer
•
1.8.1 Hands-free Answerback
•
1.10.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
•
1.13.15 PT Programming
2.3.4
PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx
New Contents
•
1.3.9 Call Waiting Tone
Automatic Call Waiting
Changed Contents
•
242
1.3.3 Call Log, Incoming
Feature Manual
2.3 Revision History
•
1.4.6 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
•
1.9.9 Intercept Routing
•
1.11.4 Music on Hold
•
1.17.5 TRS (Toll Restriction)
•
2.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Manual
243
2.3 Revision History
244
Feature Manual
Index
Feature Manual
245
Index
A
26
Caller ID
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
42
26
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
51
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
236
Capacity of System Resources
Carrier Access Code, Special
183
125
Circular Hunting
50
Class of Service (COS)
CLI —> Calling Line Identification Distribution
42
44
CO Line Access
46
CO Line Call Limitation
Code Entry, Verified
211
47
Conference
48
Confirmation Tone
Consultation Hold
50
50
COS —> Class of Service
46
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration
CPC —> Calling Party Control Signal Detection
51
AA —> Automated Attendant
61, 222
12
Absent Message
13
Account Code Entry
Alarm Information, Local
139
133
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
105
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
133
235
Appendix
14
ARS —> Automatic Route Selection
Authorization Code
19
61, 222
Automated Attendant (AA)
30
Automatic Call Hold
Automatic Call Park
36
41
Automatic Call Waiting
20
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Automatic Extension Release
21
22
Automatic Fax Transfer
118
Automatic Log-out
Automatic Privacy
161
14
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
21
Automatic Station Release —> Automatic Extension Release
Automatic Time Adjustment
23
D
Data Line Security
53
Delayed Ringing
115
203
Denied Code Tables
53
Dial Mode Selection
Dial Tone
54
55
Dial Tone Transfer
46
Dialing Digit Restriction during Conversation
Dialing, One-touch
150
57
DIL —> Direct In Line
44
Direct CO Line Access
Direct In Line (DIL)
57
58
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
187
Direct Recording
Directed Call Pickup
37
133
Directory, Call—Extension Dialing
184, 185
Directory, Call—Speed Dialing
DISA —> Direct Inward System Access
58
DISA AA Service —> DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number
63
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy
DISA Intercept Routing—DND
63
63
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer
61
DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial
DISA Security Mode
62
67
Display Information
33, 184, 189
Display Lock
Distribution, Group Call
114
68
DND —> Do Not Disturb
68
DND Override
DND, Paging
68, 153
68
Do Not Disturb (DND)
69
Door Open
Doorphone Call
70
B
Background Music (BGM)
25, 146
BGM —> Background Music
25, 146
25
BGM—External
96
Boss & Secretary feature
Busy Override Deny, Executive
73
73
Busy Override, Executive
82
Buttons, Fixed
Buttons, Flexible
84
C
Call Directory—Extension Dialing
133
Call Directory—Speed Dialing
184, 185
93
Call Forwarding (FWD)
29
Call Hold
Call Hold Retrieve Deny
30
30
Call Hold, Automatic
32
Call Log, Incoming
Call Log, Outgoing
173
34
Call Monitor
36
Call Park
Call Park Recall
36
36
Call Park Retrieve Deny
37
Call Pickup
Call Pickup Group
38, 101
37
Call Pickup, Directed
39
Call Splitting
Call Transfer
39
39
Call Transfer with Announcement
39
Call Transfer without Announcement
Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement
39
Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement
41
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
Call Waiting Tone
41
20
Callback Busy, Automatic (Camp-on)
246
Feature Manual
E
39
EFA —> External Feature Access
72
Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Dial Lock
73
Emergency Call
204
Exception Code Tables
Exclusive Call Hold
29
74
61
Index
Executive Busy Override
73
Executive Busy Override Deny
73
74
Extension Dial Lock
75
Extension Feature Clear
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Extension PIN Lock
77
78
Extension Port Configuration
21
Extension Release, Automatic
Extension User Group
101
46
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration
72
External Feature Access (EFA)
External Relay
78
79
External Sensor
Hold, Exclusive Call
29
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a
107
Host PBX)
109
Hot Line
125
Hunting, Circular
Hunting, Idle Extension
124
115
Hunting, Priority
122
Hurry-up Transfer —> Manual Queue Redirection
76
I
ICD Group —> Incoming Call Distribution Group
124
Idle Extension Hunting
Idle Extension Hunting Group
102, 124
44
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
139
Idle Line Preference
Incoming Call Distribution Group
102, 111
126
INCOMING CALL FEATURES
32
Incoming Call Log
Intercept Routing
128
63
Intercept Routing, DISA—Busy
63
Intercept Routing, DISA—DND
Intercept Routing, DISA—No Answer
63
61
Intercept Routing, DISA—No Dial
128
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA)
128
132
Intercept Routing—No Destination
133
Intercom Call
Internal Call Block
134
173
Interrupt Redial
128
IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer
Itemized Billing Code
19
F
Fax Transfer, Automatic
22
75
Feature Clear, Extension
4
Feature Highlights
Fixed Buttons
82
87
Fixed Numbering
83
Flash/Recall/Terminate
Flexible Buttons
84
87
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
92
Floating Extension
Floating Station —> Floating Extension
92
150
Full One-touch Dialing
93
FWD —> Call Forwarding
FWD, Multiple
95
97
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button
FWD—All Calls
93
93
FWD—Busy
93
FWD—Busy/No Answer
FWD—Follow Me
93
93
FWD—No Answer
98
L
LCS —> Live Call Screening
219
LED Indication
136
139
Line Preference Override
138
Line Preference—Incoming
Line Preference—Outgoing
139
219
Live Call Screening (LCS)
139
Local Alarm Information
Lock, Display
184, 189
74
Lock, Extension Dial
77
Lock, Extension PIN
Lock, Remote Extension Dial
74
117
Log-in/Log-out
G
Group Call Distribution
114
37
Group Call Pickup
101
GROUP FEATURES
Group FWD Button Types
98
37, 101
Group, Call Pickup
101
Group, Extension User
Group, Idle Extension Hunting
102, 124
102
Group, Incoming Call Distribution
102, 152
Group, Paging
Group, PS Ring
103
101
Group, Trunk
103, 213
Group, Voice Mail (VM)
M
H
Handover
163
Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation
Hands-free Answerback
105
106
Hands-free Operation
106
Headset Operation
Hold Recall
30
30
Hold Retrieve Deny, Call
29
Hold, Call
102, 111
106
Manager Features
142
122
Manual Queue Redirection
145
Message Waiting
Message, Absent
12
148
Message, Outgoing (OGM)
161
Message, Printing
Modem—On-site/Remote Programming
34
Monitor, Call
95
Multiple FWD
Music on Hold
146
25
Music, Background (BGM)
147
Mute
157
Feature Manual
247
Index
N
R
No Line Preference
138, 139
87
Numbering, Flexible/Fixed
Recall
83
219
Recording into the VPS, Two-way
187
Recording, Direct
Redial, Interrupt
173
173
Redial, Last Number
78
Relay, External
Remote Extension Dial Lock
74
158
Remote Programming
Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Dial Lock
Remote Wake-up Call
196
241
Revision History
115
Ring
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
173
138
Ringing Line Preference
14
Route Selection, Automatic (ARS)
O
OGM —> Outgoing Message
148
150
One-touch Dialing
150
One-touch Dialing, Full
On-site Programming
157
151
Operator Call
151
Operator Features
Outgoing Call Log
173
148
Outgoing Message (OGM)
119
Overflow
P
Paging
152
152
Paging Deny
Paging DND
68, 153
102, 152
Paging Group
154
Paralleled Telephone
Password Security
155
156
Pause Insertion
157
PC Programming
Personal Identification Number (PIN), Extension
76
211
Personal Identification Number (PIN), Verification Code
183
Personal Speed Dialing
Pickup Dialing —> Hot Line
109
38, 101
Pickup, Group Call
76
PIN —> Extension Personal Identification Number
PIN —> Verification Code Personal Identification Number
211
77
PIN Lock, Extension
78
Port Configuration, Extension
Portable Station (PS) Connection
162
160
Power Failure Connections
159
Power Failure Restart
Power Failure Transfer
160
160
Predialing
138, 139
Prime Line Preference
Printing Message
161
115
Priority Hunting
161
Privacy Release
Programming, PC
157
169
Programming, PT
162
PS Connection
PS Directory
164
165
PS Feature Buttons
103, 165
PS Ring Group
PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxx
241
241
PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx
169
PT Programming
Pulse to Tone Conversion
53
Q
Queue Redirection, Manual
Queuing
121
171
Quick Dialing
172
Quick Setup
248
Feature Manual
122
S
S-CO Line Access
44
219
Screening, Live Call (LCS)
Security Mode, DISA
62
79
Sensor, External
157
Serial Interface—On-site/Remote Programming
Serial Interface—SMDR
181
185
Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
176
SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording
Software Upgrade
210
183
Special Carrier Access Code
183
Speed Dialing, Personal
Speed Dialing, System
184
39
Splitting, Call
124
Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
176
77
Station Password Lock —> Extension PIN Lock
75
Station Program Clear —> Extension Feature Clear
Station Speed Dialing —> Personal Speed Dialing
183
185
SVM —> Simplified Voice Message
188
SVM Log
System Speed Dialing
184
T
TAFAS —> Trunk Answer From Any Station
192
Tenant Service
192
193
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block
83
Terminate
Terminated Hunting
125
198
Time Service
196
Timed Reminder
Toll Restriction (TRS)
202
41
Tone, Call Waiting
48
Tone, Confirmation
Tone, Dial
54
239
Tones/Ring Tones
39
Transfer Recall
Transfer, Call
39
202
TRS —> Toll Restriction
204
TRS Level
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
204
192
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
74
Index
Trunk Group
101
Trunk Group Access
44
Two-way Recording into the VPS
219
U
UCD —> Uniform Call Distribution
114
Unattended Conference
47
114
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
210
Upgrading the Software
V
Verification Code Entry
211
Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)
VIP Call
123
212
Virtual PS
103, 213
Voice Mail (VM) Group
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
216
222
Voice Mail DTMF Integration
185
Voice Message, Simplified (SVM)
VPS Data Control by the PBX
220
211
W
Wake-up Call, Remote
196
Walking COS
229
63
Walking COS—DISA
230
Walking Extension
Walking Station —> Walking Extension
231
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
117
Wrap-up
230
X
XDP, Wireless
231
Feature Manual
249
3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV
See More
Panasonic Manuals
http://www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
Communications Co., Ltd.
© 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX3087UA KK1203TM5037 (v0.003)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement